Canon ImageCLASS MF7480, imageCLASS MF7460, imageCLASS MF7470, All in One Printer 2237B008 User manual

Canon ImageCLASS MF7480, imageCLASS MF7460, imageCLASS MF7470, All in One Printer 2237B008 User manual
Basic Operation Guide
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Before Using the Machine
Original and Paper
Copying
Sending Documents
Receiving Documents
Printing
Scanning
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
PC Faxing
Remote UI
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Machine Settings
Appendix
Please read this guide before operating this product.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
Manuals for the Machine
●
●
Machine Set-Up
Software Installation
Basic Features
Maintenance
● Trouble Shooting
● Specifications
●
●
Total Operation Features
Network and Remote User Interface
● System Settings
● Reports and Lists
● Trouble Shooting
Starter Guide
Basic Operation Guide
(This Document)
●
●
●
Color Network ScanGear Installation and
Instructions
●
PCL Printer Driver Installation and Instructions
●
UFRII LT Printer Driver Installation and Instructions
●
Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
CD-ROM
Reference Guide
Color Network ScanGear
User’s Guide
PCL Driver Guide
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
UFR II Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Fax Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Indicates the manual is supplied in PDF format in the accompanying CD-ROM.
To view the manuals in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is required. If Adobe Reader/
Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is not installed on your system, please download it from the Adobe Systems
Incorporated website (http://www.adobe.com).
● Considerable effort has been made to make sure that the manuals for the machine are free of inaccuracies
and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products if you need an exact specification,
please contact Canon.
● The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
●
What Can I Do with This Machine?
What Can I Do with This
Machine?
Copy Features
Select a scan mode depending on the
type of image
Original Type Selection
→
p. 3‑11
Adjust the density level of scanned
images
Exposure
→
p. 3‑12
Enlarge or reduce copied images
Copy Ratio
→
p. 3‑14
Sort by document or page
Collate Copying
→
p. 3‑21
Make two-sided copies
Two-Sided Copying
→
ii
p. 3‑25
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Copy facing pages of an opened book
onto separate copy sheets
Two-Page Separation
→
Reference Guide
Copy multiple originals onto one
sheet
Image Combination
→
Reference Guide
Erase shadows and lines around original
images or binding holes
Frame Erase
→
Reference Guide
Copy originals of different sizes
together at the same time
Different Size Originals
→
Reference Guide
Adjust the contrast of scanned images
Sharpness
→
Reference Guide
Store and recall copy modes
Memory Keys
→
Reference Guide
iii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Sending/Receiving Features
Send documents with diverse sending
methods *1
Fax, E-Mail, I-Fax and File Server
→
Chapter 4
Send documents in a variety of file
formats *1
Setting the File Format
→
p. 4‑14
Specify a recipient with the Address
Book
Using the Address Book
→
p. 4‑43
Specify a recipient with one-touch
buttons
Using the One-Touch Buttons
→
p. 4‑45
Specify a recipient with favorites
buttons
Using the Favorites Buttons
→
p. 4‑48
*1 Indicates the features available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
iv
Specify multiple recipients as a group
Using Group Addresses
p. 4‑46
What Can I Do with This Machine?
→
Retry sending documents
automatically *1
Auto Retry
→
Reference Guide
Redial when the line is busy
Automatic Redialing
→
Reference Guide
Send documents to multiple
recipients
Broadcasting
→
Reference Guide
Send documents at a specified time
Delayed Sending
→
Reference Guide
*1 Indicates the features available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
Recall the last three sending jobs
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Job Recall
→
p. 4‑56
Forward received documents
Forwarding Documents
→
Reference Guide
Receive documents in memory
without printing out
Memory Lock Reception
→
Reference Guide
Send a fax from a PC
PC Faxing
→
vi
Fax Driver Guide
Printer Feature
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Print a document from a PC
Printing
→
PCL Driver Guide and UFR II Driver Guide
Scanner Feature
Specify detailed scanning options to
suit various images *1
Scanning
→
Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide
Remote UI Feature
Access and manage the machine from
a PC *1
Remote UI
→
Reference Guide
*1 Indicates the features available only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
vii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
System Settings
Restrict the use of the machine with
department IDs
Department ID Management
→
viii
Reference Guide
Contents
Manuals for the Machine.........................................................................i
Preface..................................................................................................xvii
Important Safety Instructions......................................................... xvii
Handling and Maintenance............................................................. xvii
Location....................................................................................................xxi
Power Supply....................................................................................... xxiii
Customer Support (U.S.A.)............................................................... xxiv
Customer Support (Canada)........................................................... xxiv
How to Use This Manual.....................................................................xxvi
Symbols Used in This Manual......................................................... xxvi
Keys Used in This Manual................................................................. xxvi
Displays Used in This Manual........................................................ xxvii
Legal Notices.....................................................................................xxviii
Copyright.............................................................................................xxviii
Disclaimers..........................................................................................xxviii
For CA, USA only...............................................................................xxviii
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product
and the Use of Images...................................................................... xxix
Trademarks..............................................................................................xxx
International Energy Star-Program................................................xxx
IPv6 Ready Logo....................................................................................xxx
Super G3................................................................................................ xxxi
ix
What Can I Do with This Machine?
What Can I Do with This Machine?.........................................................ii
Copy Features............................................................................................ii
Sending/Receiving Features................................................................iv
Printer Feature.........................................................................................vii
Scanner Feature......................................................................................vii
Remote UI Feature..................................................................................vii
System Settings......................................................................................viii
Contents..................................................................................................ix
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Users in the U.S.A..............................................................................xxxii
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile
Equipment............................................................................................ xxxii
Connection of the Equipment..................................................... xxxiii
In Case of Equipment Malfunction............................................. xxxiii
Rights of the Telephone Company............................................. xxxiv
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Notice........... xxxiv
Users in Canada................................................................................xxxvi
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile
Equipment...........................................................................................xxxvi
Notice...................................................................................................xxxvii
Utilisation au Canada.....................................................................xxxviii
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un
Télécopieur Canon.........................................................................xxxviii
Remarques.......................................................................................... xxxix
Laser Safety............................................................................................xl
1 Before Using the Machine............................................................... 1‑1
Machine Components......................................................................... 1‑2
External View..........................................................................................1‑2
Feeder.......................................................................................................1‑3
Internal View...........................................................................................1‑4
Control Panel....................................................................................... 1‑5
Main Power and Control Panel Power................................................ 1‑7
How to Turn On the Main Power.....................................................1‑7
Control Panel Power Switch..............................................................1‑9
Touch Panel Display.......................................................................... 1‑10
Frequently Used Keys....................................................................... 1‑10
Touch Panel Key Display.................................................................. 1‑11
Entering Characters.......................................................................... 1‑13
Adjusting the Brightness................................................................ 1‑16
Department/User ID Management.................................................. 1‑17
Procedure before Using the Machine......................................... 1‑17
Procedure after Using the Machine............................................ 1‑19
2 Original and Paper........................................................................... 2‑1
Original Requirements........................................................................ 2‑2
Scanning Area...................................................................................... 2‑4
Loading Originals................................................................................ 2‑5
Original Sizes..........................................................................................2‑5
Orientation..............................................................................................2‑6
On the Platen Glass..............................................................................2‑7
Into the Feeder......................................................................................2‑9
Paper Requirements.......................................................................... 2‑11
Printable Area.................................................................................... 2‑14
Loading Paper.................................................................................... 2‑15
Into the Stack Bypass....................................................................... 2‑15
Setting Paper Size and Type............................................................. 2‑19
Setting Paper Type for the Paper Drawers................................ 2‑19
Setting Paper Size and Type for the Stack Bypass.................. 2‑21
Useful Functions................................................................................ 2‑25
Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic Drawer
Switching.............................................................................................. 2‑25
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority..................................... 2‑28
Loading Preprinted Paper................................................................ 2‑29
3 Copying............................................................................................ 3‑1
Basic Copying Method........................................................................ 3‑2
Paper Selection.................................................................................... 3‑4
Automatic Paper Selection................................................................3‑4
Manual Paper Selection......................................................................3‑6
xi
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Cartridge............................................................................................ 1‑20
Maintaining the Cartridge.............................................................. 1‑21
Timer Settings................................................................................... 1‑22
Setting the Sleep Mode................................................................... 1‑22
Setting Auto Clear Time.................................................................. 1‑23
Checking Device Status..................................................................... 1‑24
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Scan Settings..................................................................................... 3‑10
Original Type Selection.................................................................... 3‑11
Exposure............................................................................................... 3‑12
Copy Ratio............................................................................................ 3‑14
Reserved Copy................................................................................... 3‑19
Reserving Copy Jobs........................................................................ 3‑19
Collate Copy....................................................................................... 3‑21
If the Rotate Mode Is Set:................................................................ 3‑22
Page Order (Collate).......................................................................... 3‑22
Same Page (Group)........................................................................... 3‑23
Two-Sided Copying........................................................................... 3‑25
1 to 2-Sided.......................................................................................... 3‑27
2 to 2-Sided.......................................................................................... 3‑28
2 to 1-Sided.......................................................................................... 3‑29
Book to 2-Sided ................................................................................. 3‑31
Confirming Settings.......................................................................... 3‑33
Changing/Canceling Selected Settings........................................... 3‑34
Canceling Copy Jobs......................................................................... 3‑35
Using the Touch Panel Display...................................................... 3‑35
Using the System Monitor Screen............................................... 3‑36
Checking Copy Jobs.......................................................................... 3‑37
Checking the Status of Copy Jobs............................................... 3‑37
4 Sending Documents........................................................................ 4‑1
Basic Sending Method........................................................................ 4‑2
Sending an E-Mail Message (imageCLASS MF7480 Only).....4‑4
Sending an I-Fax (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)...........................4‑8
Sending a Job to a File Server
(imageCLASS MF7480 Only).......................................................... 4‑11
Setting the File Format (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)........... 4‑14
xii
Direct Sending................................................................................... 4‑54
Job Recall........................................................................................... 4‑56
Storing/Editing Address Book.......................................................... 4‑57
Storing/Editing Address Book....................................................... 4‑58
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons........................................... 4‑71
Erasing Addresses.............................................................................. 4‑83
Storing/Editing Favorites Buttons............................................... 4‑86
Canceling TX Jobs.............................................................................. 4‑90
Using the Touch Panel Display...................................................... 4‑90
Checking TX Jobs............................................................................... 4‑94
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs................................................... 4‑94
Printing the Fax Job Log (Activity Report)................................ 4‑96
Checking the Status of Send Jobs
(imageCLASS MF7480 Only).......................................................... 4‑97
5 Receiving Documents...................................................................... 5‑1
Receiving Documents......................................................................... 5‑2
Canceling RX Jobs............................................................................... 5‑3
xiii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Scan Settings..................................................................................... 4‑16
Selecting a Scan Mode.................................................................... 4‑16
Changing the Color Mode (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)..... 4‑18
Document Size................................................................................... 4‑20
Resolution............................................................................................ 4‑22
Scan Density and Original Type Settings.................................. 4‑24
Two-Sided Originals.......................................................................... 4‑28
Different Size Originals.................................................................... 4‑30
Specifying Destinations.................................................................... 4‑32
Using the New Address Tab........................................................... 4‑32
Using the Address Book.................................................................. 4‑43
Using the One-Touch Buttons....................................................... 4‑45
Using Group Addresses................................................................... 4‑46
Using the Favorites Buttons........................................................... 4‑48
Checking/Changing a Destination.............................................. 4‑49
Erasing a Destination....................................................................... 4‑51
Manual Sending................................................................................ 4‑52
Checking RX Jobs................................................................................ 5‑5
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs......................................................5‑5
Available Paper Sizes........................................................................ 5‑11
What Can I Do with This Machine?
6 Printing............................................................................................. 6‑1
Printing Documents............................................................................ 6‑2
Canceling Print Jobs............................................................................ 6‑5
Using the System Monitor Screen..................................................6‑5
Checking Print Jobs............................................................................. 6‑7
Checking the Status of Print Jobs...................................................6‑7
7 Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)........................... 7‑1
Scanning to a Computer..................................................................... 7‑2
Switching the Scanner Online and Offline........................................ 7‑4
Switching the Scanner Online.........................................................7‑4
Switching the Scanner Offline.........................................................7‑5
Canceling Scan Jobs............................................................................ 7‑7
Using the System Monitor Screen..................................................7‑7
8 PC Faxing.......................................................................................... 8‑1
PC Faxing.............................................................................................. 8‑2
9 Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)......................... 9‑1
Remote UI............................................................................................. 9‑2
10 Maintenance................................................................................ 10‑1
Cleaning the Machine....................................................................... 10‑2
Exterior.................................................................................................. 10‑2
Fixing Unit............................................................................................ 10‑3
Scanning Area..................................................................................... 10‑6
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge...................................................... 10‑12
Replacing the Cartridge.................................................................. 10‑14
xiv
Recycling Used Cartridges.............................................................. 10‑20
The Clean Earth Campaign...........................................................10‑20
U.S.A. PROGRAM..............................................................................10‑22
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME........................10‑25
Consumables................................................................................... 10‑27
Clearing Jams..................................................................................... 11‑2
Feeder.................................................................................................... 11‑5
Stack Bypass........................................................................................ 11‑7
Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit)................................................ 11‑8
Duplex Unit........................................................................................11‑11
Paper Drawer 1.................................................................................11‑13
Paper Drawer 2.................................................................................11‑15
Error Messages................................................................................ 11‑17
Error Codes...................................................................................... 11‑21
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning..................................... 11‑28
Service Call Messages..................................................................... 11‑29
If You Cannot Solve a Problem....................................................... 11‑31
Customer Support (U.S.A.)............................................................11‑31
Customer Support (Canada)........................................................11‑31
12 Machine Settings......................................................................... 12‑1
Machine Settings............................................................................... 12‑2
Printing USER'S DATA LIST.............................................................. 12‑2
Accessing the Additional Functions Menu............................... 12‑3
Using the Printer Settings Menu.................................................. 12‑4
xv
What Can I Do with This Machine?
11 Troubleshooting.......................................................................... 11‑1
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Additional Functions Menu.............................................................. 12‑6
Common Settings.............................................................................. 12‑6
Copy Settings....................................................................................12‑10
Timer Setting.....................................................................................12‑11
Communications Settings............................................................12‑12
Adjustment/Cleaning.....................................................................12‑17
Printer Settings.................................................................................12‑20
Address Book Settings...................................................................12‑26
Report Settings.................................................................................12‑27
System Settings................................................................................12‑29
13 Appendix...................................................................................... 13‑1
Specifications.................................................................................... 13‑2
General.................................................................................................. 13‑2
Feeder.................................................................................................... 13‑3
Duplex Unit.......................................................................................... 13‑4
Copier..................................................................................................... 13‑4
Printer.................................................................................................... 13‑5
Facsimile............................................................................................... 13‑6
Send (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)............................................... 13‑7
Ethernet Interface Adaptor
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)........................................ 13‑8
Index................................................................................................... 13‑9
xvi
Preface
Thank you for choosing a Canon product. Before using the machine, please read the
following instructions for your safety.
Please read these “Important Safety Instructions” thoroughly before operating the
machine. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other persons
or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also, since it may
result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise
specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this machine could result in personal
injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your
Limited Warranty.
Handling and Maintenance
– Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature and
high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
– If the machine makes strange noises, or gives off smoke, heat, or strange smells,
immediately turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Then, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer
Care Center. Continued use of the machine in this condition may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
– Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes
into contact with the electrical components inside the machine, this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
– To avoid damage to the power cord and creating a fire hazard, always turn off the main
power switch, and unplug the interface cable when moving the machine. Otherwise, the
power cord or interface cable may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
xvii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Important Safety Instructions
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do
not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.)
inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the
machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled
inside the machine, immediately turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the
power cord from the power outlet. Then contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or
the Canon Customer Care Center.
– Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in
personal injury.
– Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.
– Do not press down hard on the feeder when using the platen glass to make copies of
thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in personal injury.
– Do not put your hand close to the rollers on the output tray. The machine may suddenly
begin to print even if it is not in operation, causing your clothing or fingers to become
caught in the machine and resulting in injury.
– If the laser beam escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your
eyes.
– The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the
product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser
beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Read the
following remarks and instructions for safety.
– Be careful when removing printed paper from output trays or when aligning it, because it
may be hot and result in burn injury.
– Turn off the control panel power switch for safety when the machine will not be used
for a long period of time, such as overnight. Also, turn off the main power switch, and
disconnect the power cord for safety when the machine will not be used for an extended
period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.
xviii
– Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.
– Do not remove the caution label attached to the fixing unit and the duplex unit.
xix
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– When cleaning the machine, first turn off the main power switch, and then disconnect
the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.
– Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around
the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure
that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of
time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and
become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.
– Clean the machine using a slightly dampened cloth with a mild detergent mixed with
water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. Check
detergent for flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into contact with a
high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
– There are some area inside the machine which are subject to high-voltage. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this
may result in burns or electrical shock.
– Do not burn or throw used cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– The fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings inside the machine may become
hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the
machine, do not touch the fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings, as doing
so may result in burns.
– When removing jammed paper or replacing the cartridge, take care not to allow the
toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or
clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them
with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the
jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into
your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately
with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
– When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your
hands on the edges of the originals or paper.
– When removing a used cartridge, remove the cartridge carefully to prevent the toner
from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or
mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
– The machine is heavy, and requires two or more people to lift it. Therefore, do not
attempt to move it by yourself. Doing so may result in personal injury.
– Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments.
xx
– When carrying the machine, be sure to hold the parts indicated below. Failure to do so
may cause the machine to be dropped and result in injury.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of this machine before
carrying. (See “Specifications,” on p. 13‑2.)
Location
– Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If
flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
– Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with
a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these
items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the main power
switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact Canon
Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.
– Necklaces and other metal objects
– Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
xxi
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the
machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
– Never block the ventilation slots and louvers on the machine. These openings are
provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Blocking these
openings can cause the machine to overheat. Never place the machine on a soft surface,
such as a sofa or rug.
– Do not install the machine in the following locations:
– A damp or dusty location
– A location near water faucets or water
– A location exposed to direct sunlight
– A location subject to high temperatures
– A location near open flames
– Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation.
4" (100 mm) or more
49 1/4" (1,249 mm)*
40" (1,016 mm)
* The depth is 50 5/8"(1,281mm) when
the cartridge holder is pulled out.
– Be sure to provide enough space over the top of the machine to be able to open the
feeder properly.
xxii
Power Supply
xxiii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power
cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in
a fire or electrical shock.
– Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power
cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
– Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in
electrical shock.
– Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
– Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
– Insert the power plug completely into the power outlet, as failure to do so may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
– Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
– As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire
or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one rated for voltages
of 120 V AC and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into
the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the
extension cord.
– Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
– Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power
cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the
power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
– Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily.
If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an
emergency.
– Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady voltage.
– Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which the
machine is connected.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy objects are
placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a
fire or electrical shock.
This product emits low level magnetic flux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move
away from this product and consult your doctor.
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation.
If you encounter a problem with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the
information in Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,” If you cannot solve the problem or if you
think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the
Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00
P.M. EST Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. For interactive
troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers to
frequently asked questions you can also visit our support site at www.canontechsupport.
com.
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
– For interactive troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and
answers to frequently asked questions (www.canon.ca)
– Automated interactive telephone support on most current products 24 hours, 7 days a
week (1-800-652-2666).
– Free live technical support 9:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding
holidays) for products still under warranty (1-800-652-2666)
xxiv
– The location of the authorized service facility nearest you (1-800-652-2666) If the
problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair
options are available at the time of your call to the Free live technical support number
above or via the website at www.canon.ca
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
xxv
How to Use This Manual
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used throughout the manuals for the machine and indicate the
warnings, cautions and notes you should keep in mind when using the machine.
Indicates a warning that may lead to death or serious injury if not observed.
Explains how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your
machine.
Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties.
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are
expressed in this manual:
• Touch Panel Display Keys:
[Key Name]
Examples:
[Cancel]
[Done]
• Control Panel Keys:
key icon (Key Name)
Examples:
(Start)
(Stop)
• Items on Computer Operation Screens:
[Item Name]
Examples:
[Save]
[OK]
xxvi
Displays Used in This Manual
The keys which you should press are marked with the hand symbol ( ), as shown below.
3
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Press this key for operation.
xxvii
Legal Notices
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Copyright
Copyright 2007 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES
OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.
For CA, USA only
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
xxviii
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of
Images
–
–
–
–
–
Paper Money
Money Orders
Certificates of Deposit
Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Identifying Badges or Insignias
–
–
–
–
–
Travelers Checks
Food Stamps
Passports
Immigration Papers
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
– Selective Service or Draft Papers
– Bonds or Other Certificates of
Indebtedness
– Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental – Stock Certificates
Agencies
– Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of – Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without
Title
Permission of Copyright Owner
xxix
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use
of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be
prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability.
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a
guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or
otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned,
printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for
guidance.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageCLASS are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows Vista is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries. All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or
service marks of their respective owners.
International Energy Star-Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this
product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an
international program that promotes energy saving through the use of
computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products
with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an
open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers,
displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are
uniform among participating nations.
IPv6 Ready Logo
This machine has acquired IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1, as established by
the IPv6 Forum.
xxx
Super G3
xxxi
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax
machines that use ITU-T V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps* modems. Super G3
High Speed Fax machines allow transmission times of approximately 3
seconds* per page which results in reduced telephone line charges.
* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on
CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG, Standard Mode) at 33.6 Kbps modem
speed. The PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) currently
supports 28.8 Kbps modem speeds or slower, depending on
telephone line conditions.
Users in the U.S.A.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See p. 13‑2 for specific dimensions
and weight.
B.
Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the telephone
company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile operation is not
possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The
line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-orIDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500
(rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without
“Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because
they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a
facsimile error.
C.
Power Requirements
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that
cause “electrical noise.” Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this
sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with communications equipment and the
sending and receiving of documents.
xxxii
Connection of the Equipment
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described
in this guide or the Reference Guide, disconnect the equipment from the telephone line
cable and disconnect the power cord. The telephone line cable should not be reconnected
or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is completely resolved. Users
should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile Service Dealer for the servicing of
equipment.
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer
from whom you purchased the equipment (if under warranty), or with whom you have a
servicing contract. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both purchased and are
using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the “SUPPORT” page on Canon U.S.A.’s
Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com).
xxxiii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted
by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this
number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices that
may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result
in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the
sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that
may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:
AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10
is a REN of 1.0).
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this equipment.
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring
using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company.
Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Rights of the Telephone Company
If this equipment (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470/MF7460) causes harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone
company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services that may affect the
operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone company
is required to give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if advance notice is not
possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, the
customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes
it is necessary.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains
in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and
time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and
the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your machine, complete the procedure for registering your name,
unit’s telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Notice
imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470/MF7460: Model F189900
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept an interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
xxxiv
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
TEL No. 1-516-328-5600
xxxv
What Can I Do with This Machine?
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cables are required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified
in this manual. If you make such changes or modifications, you could be required to stop
operation of the equipment.
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer
from whom you purchased the equipment (if under warranty), or with whom you have
a servicing contact. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both purchased and are
using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the “SUPPORT” page on Canon USA’s Web
site (http://www.usa.canon.com).
Users in Canada
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See p. 13‑2 for specific dimensions
and weight.
B.
Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.
2. Order a CA11A modular jack which should be installed by the telephone company. If the
CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The
line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-orIDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500
(rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without
“Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because
they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a
facsimile error.
C.
Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should
be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment that is
thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular
jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.
xxxvi
Notice
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B limits.
xxxvii
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
– The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices
allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
– The REN of this product is 1.0.
– Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases,
the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be
extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
deterioration of service in some situations.
– Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
– Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Utilisation au Canada
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un
Télécopieur Canon
A. Emplacement
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille appropriée. Voir la
page 13‑2 pour les indications de poids et dimensions.
B.
Installation téléphonique
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions) doit être utilisée.
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie
téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d’affaires normale de
qualité téléphonique courante ou équivalente. Prenez un abonnement d’une ligne par
appareil.
Ligne automatique interurbaine
ou
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles, à savoir: ligne
téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également
possible de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes
émettent des signaux d’appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le
fonctionnement du télécopieur.
C.
Condition d’alimentation
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type simple ou
double, et qui ne sert pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un climatiseur ou
tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat. L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères.
Pour faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche de la prise de courant.
xxxviii
Remarques
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les utilisateurs sont invités à faire
appel à un service d’inspection faisant autorité en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien,
selon le cas.
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.
xxxix
What Can I Do with This Machine?
– Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie
Canada.
– Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le connecter
à l’équipement de la compagnie de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet
appareil en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se peut qu’il faille étendre
la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d’abonné, qui a été installée par la
compagnie, au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologues (rallonge téléphonique).
L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect des conditions mentionnées
ci-dessus ne constitue pas une garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service
dans certaines circonstances.
– L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison
d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule
condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs
n’excède pas 5.
– Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1,0.
– Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société d’entretien
canadienne autorisée par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par le fournisseur.
Toute réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I’utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout
mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de télécommunication le droit de
débrancher I’appareil.
– Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que les prises de terre de I’appareil
d’alimentation, les lignes téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y en a, sont
bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans les
zones rurales.
What Can I Do with This Machine?
Laser Safety
This product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class I laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Also, this
product is certified as a Class I laser product under IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001,
EN60825-1:1994+A1:2002+A2:2001. This means that the product does not produce
hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any
phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external covers, except as
directed by this guide.
The labels shown below are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and next
to the cartridge, behind the front cover.
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
xl
1
Before Using the
Machine
Before Using the Machine
Machine Components∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙1‑2
Control Panel∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙1‑5
Main Power and Control Panel Power∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙1‑7
Touch Panel Display∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 1‑10
Department/User ID Management∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 1‑17
Cartridge∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 1‑20
Timer Settings∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 1‑22
Checking Device Status∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 1‑24
Machine Components
Before Using the Machine
External View
A
Feeder
B
Main Power Switch
Press to the “I” side to turn the power on. (See
“Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on
p. 1‑7.)
C
Paper Drawers
D
Stack Bypass
E
1‑2
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically
fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the
platen glass. The feeder also automatically turns
over two-sided originals to make two or one
sided copies.
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (22 lb bond
(80 g/m2)).
Use the stack bypass to feed paper manually
and for loading nonstandard paper stock, such
as envelopes. (See “Into the Stack Bypass,” on
p. 2‑15.)
Main Control Panel
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and
indicators required for operating the machine.
(See “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on
p. 1‑7.)
Feeder
A
Feeder Cover
B
Slide Guides
C
Original Supply Tray
D
Original Output Area
Open this cover to remove jammed originals.
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of
the original.
Originals that have been scanned from the
original supply tray are output to the original
output area in the order that they are fed into
the feeder.
– Do not insert your fingers into the gaps around the
original supply tray, as your fingers may get caught.
Also, be careful not to drop objects, such as paper
clips into the gaps, as doing so may cause damage
to the machine or cause it to break down.
– When using the platen glass to copy or scan thick
originals, such as books or magazines, do not press
down hard on the feeder.
– If the original output area is blocked, originals may
get damaged, and printing may not be performed
correctly. Therefore, do not place any objects in the
original output area.
1‑3
Before Using the Machine
Originals placed here are automatically fed
sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the
platen glass. Place originals into this tray with
the surface that you want to scan face up.
Before Using the Machine
Internal View
1‑4
A
Platen Glass
B
Cartridge
C
Front Cover
D
Paper Drawer’s Left Cover
E
Fixing Unit
F
Left Cover
G
Duplex Unit
H
Scanning Area
Place originals here when scanning books, thick
originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.
When toner runs out, pull out the cartridge, and
replace it with a new one.
Open this cover to replace the cartridge.
Open these covers when clearing a paper jam in
Paper Drawer 2.
When paper jam occurs in the fixing unit, see
“Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit),” on. p. 11‑8.
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam
inside the machine or replacing the cartridge.
The duplex unit enables you to use the 2-Sided
mode for copying or printing.
Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.
Control Panel
Before Using the Machine
A
B
C
D
COPY key
G
Serial No. key
H
Stop key
I
Start key
J
Main Power Indicator
Press to enable the Network Scan function. (See
the Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide.)
K
Clear key
Reset key
L
Error Indicator
Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic
Features screen appears on the touch panel
display.
SEND key
Press to use the Send/Fax function. The Send
Basic Features screen appears on the touch
panel display. The Send function is available
only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
SCAN key (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470
Only)
Press to restore the standard settings of the
machine.
E
Numeric keys
F
Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power
Supply)
Press to enter numerical values.
Press to display the serial number on the touch
panel display.
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan,
copy, or fax job (scanning only).
Press to start an operation.
Lights when the main power is turned on.
Press to clear entered values or characters.
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the
machine. When the Error indicator flashes,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display. When the Error indicator
maintains a steady red light, contact Canon
Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon
Customer Care Center.
Press to turn the control panel on or off. When
the control panel is turned off, the machine is in
the Sleep mode.
1‑5
Before Using the Machine
M
Log In/Out key
N
Processing/Data Indicator
O
Display Contrast Dial
P
Additional Functions key
Q
Touch Panel Display
1‑6
Press when setting or enabling Department ID
Management or User ID Management.
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is
performing operations. When the Processing/
Data indicator maintains a steady green light,
fax data is stored in memory.
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel
display.
Press to specify additional functions.
The settings screen for each function is shown
on this display.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control
panel power switch.
Before Using the Machine
How to Turn On the Main Power
This section explains how to turn on the main power.
1
Make sure that the power plug
is firmly inserted into the power
outlet.
When the machine is ready to scan, the
screen below is displayed. The example
shown below is the Copy Basic Features
screen.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord
with wet hands, as this may result in electrical
shock.
2
Press the main power switch to “I”
side.
– If the main power indicator does not light,
make sure that the power cord is firmly
inserted into the power outlet.
– If the message <Enter the Department ID
and Password using the numeric keys.>
or <Enter the User ID and Password.>
appears on the touch panel display, enter
your registered ID and password. (See
“Department/User ID Management,” on
p. 1‑17.)
The main power indicator on the control
panel lights and the screen below is displayed
until the machine is ready to scan.
1‑7
Before Using the Machine
– If you want to turn the main power off, first turn the control panel power switch off, and then press the main
power switch to the “ ” side.
– If you turn off the main power, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power back on.
– Do not turn the main power off if you want to be able to send or receive fax/I-fax documents. Sending or
receiving fax/I-fax documents cannot be done when the main power is turned off.
– If User ID Management is set to [On], the machine will take longer to become ready to scan.
– You can set the initial screen (the first screen that appears when the machine is turned on) from the
Additional Functions screen. The initial screen can be the Copy, Send, Scan, or System Monitor screen. (See
“Common Settings,” on p. 12‑6.)
– The machine will enter the Sleep mode if the main power switch is pressed when the machine’s power is on
and a certain type of optional equipment is connected.
1‑8
Control Panel Power Switch
To turn the control panel on or off, press the control panel power switch. When turned off,
the machine is in the Sleep mode.
Control Panel Power Switch
Machine Status
On
Standby mode (ready for immediate copying or printing)
Off
Sleep mode
Before Using the Machine
– The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the Sleep mode.
Fax/I-fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the Sleep mode.
– The energy consumption while the machine is in the Sleep mode can be set from the Additional Functions
screen. (See “Common Settings,” on p. 12‑6.)
– The machine will not enter the Sleep mode if it is scanning or printing.
– If there is less time than specified in Auto Sleep Time remaining before sending a job which has been reserved
for delayed sending, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.
– If there is a job which has been reserved for delayed sending, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode
completely.
– If you are using a management application to view or manage the settings and status of the machine via the
network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
– If you are using the machine as a Windows printer, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely if
SNMP Status is enabled for your operating system (unless your computer is turned off). For more information
on disabling SNMP Status, contact your network administrator.
– It takes approximately 10 seconds for the machine to recover after the Sleep mode is deactivated.
– If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to [Low], it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch panel
display to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.
– The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is [High] even when the energy consumption level is set to
[Low], such as when a job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, receive job, or sending a
forwarding done notice).
1‑9
Touch Panel Display
Before Using the Machine
Most operations on this machine are executed from the touch panel display. By
pressing the keys according to the instructions on the touch panel display, you can
utilize the functions of this machine efficiently.
Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers. Do not press the touch panel display with a pencil,
ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can scratch the surface of the touch panel display. Doing so may
damage the touch panel display.
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.
Frequently Used Keys
The keys that are used frequently on the touch panel display are:
Press to cancel the mode that you are currently setting, or a
mode that has already been set, on screens other than the
Additional Functions screen. Also, press to close the current
mode’s setting screen, and keep the original settings set
from the Additional Functions screen.
Press to confirm the current settings and proceed to the
next step in the procedure.
Press to go back to the previous step in the procedure,
without saving the current settings.
Press to close the current screen.
Press to confirm the current settings of a mode.
1‑10
Touch Panel Key Display
When you press a key on the touch panel display, that key is highlighted, and the
corresponding mode is set. When you set certain modes, the characters on some keys may
become grayed out. You cannot press keys that are grayed out. This means that you cannot
set these modes in combination with the presently set mode.
● Mode Setting Keys
Description
The 2-Page Separation mode is not set, and can
be selected.
The 2-Page Separation mode is set, and can be
selected.
(The key is highlighted)
The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be set in
combination with the presently set mode.
(The characters on the key are grayed out.)
● Keys That Indicate When a Mode Is Turned On or Off
Mode Is Turned Off
Mode Is Turned On
(Highlighted)
Keys with a right triangle (▶) indicate that those keys have additional screens to set their
functions. If you press a key that does not have a right triangle (▶), it turns that mode on or
off.
Keys That Display Additional Settings
Keys That Turn Modes On/Off
Keys with a black square (■) in the lower right corner, that appear on screens for storing
settings, already have settings stored in them.
Settings Are Stored
No Settings Are Stored
1‑11
Before Using the Machine
State of Keys
● Keys That Display a Drop-Down List
Pressing a key that has a right triangle (▶) to the right of the name of the selection, displays
a drop-down list containing other setting options.
Before Using the Machine
Before Selection
Drop-Down List
After Selection
● Numeric Keys
Anytime the numeric keys icon is displayed on the screen, you can use the numeric keys on
the control panel to enter values.
You can enter values using the numeric keys on the touch
panel display or on the control panel.
You can only enter values using the numeric keys on the
control panel.
1‑12
Entering Characters
For screens that require alphanumeric entries, enter characters using the keys displayed on
the touch panel display, as shown below.
● Alphanumeric Characters
Example: Enter <Canon>.
Before Using the Machine
1
① Make sure that <Alphabet> is displayed
above [Entry Mode].
Each press of [Entry Mode] switches the
entry mode between <Alphabet> and
<Other>.
② Enter <Canon>.
– To enter uppercase letters, press [Shift].
– To enter a space, press [Space].
– To move the cursor, press [◀] or [▶].
– To enter symbols, press [Entry Mode]
to select [Other], then enter the desired
symbols.
– If you make a mistake when entering
characters, press [◀] or [▶] to position the
cursor on the right side of the characters
to be deleted, then press [Backspace] to
delete the characters and enter the correct
characters.
– To delete all of the characters you have
entered, press (Clear).
– The available entry modes, and the
maximum number of characters that you
can enter vary, depending on the type of
entries you are making.
③ Press [OK].
1‑13
● Symbols
Example: Enter <é>.
Before Using the Machine
1
① Press [Entry Mode] to select [Other].
② Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired
symbol that you want to enter.
③ Press [é].
– To enter a space, press [Space].
– To move the cursor, press [◀] or [▶].
– To enter alphanumeric characters, press
[Entry Mode] to select [Alphabet], then
enter the desired characters.
– If you make a mistake when entering
characters, press [◀] or [▶] to position the
cursor on the right side of the characters
to be deleted, then press [Backspace] to
delete the characters and enter the correct
characters.
– To delete all of the characters you have
entered, press (Clear).
– The available entry modes, and the
maximum number of characters that you
can enter vary, depending on the type of
entries you are making.
④ Press [OK].
1‑14
● Values in Inches
1
① Press the keys in the following order: [5],
[_], [1], [/], and [2].
– If you make a mistake when entering
values, press [C], then enter the correct
values.
– You can enter only 2, 4, 8, or 16 as the
denominator.
– The value entered in inches is converted
to millimeters by the machine each time
it is entered. Thus, there may be a slight
difference between the value calculated
and the actual value entered.
– To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
1‑15
Before Using the Machine
If you want to enter values in inches in all modes which require a numeric entry, set Inch
Entry to [On] in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See “Common
Settings,” on p. 12‑6.) This enables you to enter values in inches when you press [Inch] on a
screen requiring a numeric entry or measurement.
The default entry mode for numeric values is inches, but you can change it to millimeters by
turning the Inch Entry mode [Off ].
The following example shows you how to enter 5 1/2" for X value in the Irregular Size mode.
Adjusting the Brightness
Before Using the Machine
If the touch panel display is difficult to view, use the display contrast dial on the control
panel to adjust its brightness.
To make the touch panel display brighter, turn the dial counterclockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial
clockwise.
1‑16
Department/User ID Management
If Department ID Management or User ID Management is set to [On] in System
Settings, you must enter your ID and password to be able to operate the machine. For
details, see Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference Guide.
Before Using the Machine
Procedure before Using the Machine
● Department ID Management
1
3
2
4
① Enter the Department ID using
– (numeric keys).
① If the password is set, enter the password
using – (numeric keys).
The numbers that you enter for the
password are displayed as asterisks
(*******).
1‑17
5
Press
(Log In/Out).
The Basic Features screen of the selected
function appears on the touch panel display.
Before Using the Machine
● User ID Management
1
3
2
4
① Enter the User ID.
You can also enter the User ID using
– (numeric keys).
② Press [OK].
1‑18
① Enter the password.
You can also enter the password using
– (numeric keys).
② Press [OK].
5
Press
(Log In/Out).
The Basic Features screen of the selected
function appears on the touch panel display.
Procedure after Using the Machine
Be sure to press
Before Using the Machine
1
(Log In/Out).
If you do not press
(Log In/Out) after you
are finished operating the machine, any
subsequent copies and scans for Send/Fax
functions made are added to the total of the
Department ID you previously entered, or the
total of the User ID who previously logged on
to the machine.
1‑19
Before Using the Machine
Cartridge
The lifetime of the Canon genuine replacement cartridge is approximately 10,000
pages. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of originals
printed. If your average original contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of
the cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a
cartridge, be sure to use a cartridge designed for this product. To purchase the Canon
genuine replacement cartridge, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or Canon
Customer Care Center (U.S.A.:1-800-828-4040, Canada:1-800-652-2666).
Cartridge name:
Canon Cartridge 105
1‑20
Maintaining the Cartridge
● Keep the cartridge away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The
Do not place the cartridge in fire. Toner powder is flammable.
1‑21
Before Using the Machine
magnet inside the cartridge may harm these items.
● Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in
temperature.
● Do not expose the cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes.
● Store the cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open the bag until you are ready to install
the cartridge in the machine.
● Save the toner cartridge’s protective bag in case you need to repack and transport the
cartridge at a later date.
● Do not store the cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such
as from aerosol sprays.
● Do not remove the cartridge from the machine unnecessarily.
● Do not open the drum protective shutter on the cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if
the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
● Always hold the cartridge by its handle to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.
● Do not stand the cartridge on end, and do not turn it upside down. If toner becomes
caked in the toner cartridge, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the
cartridge.
● If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it
comes in contact with your skin, rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation
on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.
● When removing the cartridge from the machine, make sure to remove it carefully. If not
removed with care, the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes
and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.
● Keep the cartridge away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a
doctor immediately.
● Do not disassemble the cartridge. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact
with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor
immediately.
Timer Settings
Before Using the Machine
Setting the Sleep Mode
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation is
performed), the control panel power switch automatically switches off to save power. The
machine has entered the Sleep mode.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
① Press [On].
② Press [-] or [+] to specify the desired Auto
Sleep Time.
The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 3 to
30 minutes.
You can also enter values using
– (numeric keys).
③ Press [OK].
3
5
1‑22
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
– To resume normal mode from the Sleep mode, press the control panel power switch.
– To enter the Sleep mode manually, press the control panel power switch.
– The machine can continue to receive fax/I-fax documents, and process or print data sent from computers
even if the machine is in the Sleep mode.
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation
is performed), the display returns to the Basic Features screen (standard settings) of the
selected function. This period of time is called the “Auto Clear Time.”
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
① Press [-] or [+] to specify the desired Auto
Clear Time.
The Auto Clear Time can be set from 0 to 9
minutes (in one minute increments).
You can also enter values using
– (numeric keys).
② Press [OK].
3
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
1‑23
Before Using the Machine
Setting Auto Clear Time
Before Using the Machine
Checking Device Status
You can check the current machine status both on the Job/Print Status Display Area
and on the Device status screen.
The Job/Print Status Display Area (A) displays the progress of jobs and copy
operations, and the status of your machine and consumables. Also, the current
Department ID or user name can be displayed here. (See Chapter 8, “System Settings,”
in the Reference Guide.)
For the Device status screen, press [System Monitor] (B) to display the System Monitor
screen, then press [Device]. The Device status screen enables you to check the
following information:
1‑24
Before Using the Machine
A
Displays the status of the device and the current job.
B
Displays recovery procedures for problems, such as clearing a paper jam or replacing
the cartridge.
C
Displays the status of toner by pressing [Consumable].
D
Displays the remaining amount of available system memory.
E
Displays the paper supply, paper type, and paper size loaded in the paper drawers or
the stack bypass.
The jobs may not be accepted even if <Avail. Memory> has not reached zero percent. In this case, print or delete
jobs stored in the memory and try again.
1‑25
1‑26
Before Using the Machine
2
Original and
Paper
Original and Paper
Original Requirements∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙2‑2
Scanning Area∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙2‑4
Loading Originals∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙2‑5
Paper Requirements∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 2‑11
Printable Area∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 2‑14
Loading Paper∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 2‑15
Setting Paper Size and Type∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 2‑19
Useful Functions∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 2‑25
Loading Preprinted Paper∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 2‑29
Original and Paper
Original Requirements
Platen Glass
Feeder
Type
–
–
–
–
–
Plain paper
Thick originals
Photographs
Small originals (e.g., index cards)
Special types of paper (e.g., tracing
paper*1, transparencies*1, etc.)
– Book (Height: max. 1" (24 mm))
Plain paper (Multipage originals
or one page originals)
Size
Max. 8 1/2" x 11 5/8"
(Max. 216 x 297 mm)
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, STMT
Weight
Max. 4.4 lb (2 kg)
16 to 28 lb bond
(52 to 105 g/m2)
Quantity
1 sheet
LTR: 50 sheets
(22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
LGL/11" x 17": 25 sheets
(22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
STMT: 50 sheets
(22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
*1 When copying a transparent original such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper
to cover the original after placing it face-down on the platen glass.
2‑2
● Do not place the original on the platen glass or into the feeder until the glue, ink or
Original and Paper
correction fluid on the original is completely dry.
● Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder:
– Wrinkled or creased paper
– Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
– Curled or rolled paper
– Coated paper
– Torn paper
– Onion skin or thin paper
– Originals with staples or paper clips attached
– Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
– Originals with tears or large binding holes
– Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
– Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
2‑3
Scanning Area
Original and Paper
Make sure your original's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the
following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may
be slight variations in actual use.
2‑4
Loading Originals
Original Sizes
The size of the original is automatically detected, and the original is scanned. If the output
paper in the recipient’s machine is not equal to the scanned size, the original image may be
reduced in size or divided into smaller parts before it is sent.
The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a nonstandard paper size,
such as a book. In this case, specify the size at which you want to scan the original. (See
“Document Size,” on p. 4‑20.)
2‑5
Original and Paper
Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and
type of the original, and the scan modes that you want to use.
● Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books and
magazines), heavyweight or lightweight originals, and transparencies.
● Feeder
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same
time, and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning
area and scans them. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and
scanned as two-sided originals.
Orientation
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your
original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner) or the
back edge of the feeder.
Original and Paper
Platen Glass
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
Feeder
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
– If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left
corner), your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the scan mode that you have set.
– Originals of the following sizes can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed
for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than vertically placed ones. Place originals horizontally
when scanning with a Preset Zoom, such as when enlarging an LTR original onto 11" x 17" paper.
– Platen glass: LTR, STMT
– Feeder: LTR
– Horizontally placed LTR and STMT originals are referred to as LTRR and STMTR.
– 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally on the feeder.
2‑6
On the Platen Glass
The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and LTRR.
1
Lift the feeder.
This machine is equipped with an open/close
sensor (A) on the feeder (see circled area
in the above illustration). When placing
originals on the platen glass, lift the feeder
high enough so that the sensor does not
touch the feeder. If the sensor continues to
touch the feeder, the size of the originals may
not be detected correctly.
2
When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT
original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place the
original horizontally on the platen glass, and
align it with the LTRR or STMTR marks.
3
Gently close the feeder.
Place your original face down.
The surface of the original that you want to
scan must be placed face down.
Align the top edge of your original with the
back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in
the top left corner).
– Close the feeder gently to avoid catching
your hands, as this may result in personal
injury.
– Do not press down hard on the feeder
when using the platen glass to make copies
of thick books. Doing so may damage the
platen glass and result in personal injury.
2‑7
Original and Paper
Place books and other bound originals on the
platen glass in the same way.
Original and Paper
– If you are placing the original on the platen
glass, the size of the original is detected
after the feeder is closed. Make sure to
close the feeder before scanning.
– Open the feeder and remove the original
from the platen glass when scanning is
complete.
– The machine cannot detect the size of
STMT and STMTR originals that are placed
on the platen glass. After pressing (Start),
follow the instructions on the screen to
specify the original size. You can also
manually select the paper size.
2‑8
Into the Feeder
1
2
Adjust the slide guides to fit the
size of your originals.
Neatly place your originals with
the side to be copied face up into
the original supply tray.
Place your originals into the feeder as far as
they will go.
If any dirt on the original scanning area is
detected when the originals are placed in the
feeder, the following screen appears. Even
though streaks may appear on the copies,
you can continue to scan your originals by
pressing [Done].
It is recommended, however, that you open
the feeder, clean the scanning area, and then
close the feeder. The following screen will not
appear once the scanning area is clean.
For instructions on cleaning the original
scanning area, see “Cleaning the Machine,” on
p. 10‑2.
2‑9
Original and Paper
– If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become creased, and make
feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times (this number varies, depending on the
type and quality of the original).
– If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder cleaning procedure.
(See “Cleaning the Machine,” on p. 10‑2.)
– Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder.
– Set the originals one by one if they are very thin (10 to 16 lb (37 to 52 g/m2)) or very thick (28 to 32 lb bond
(105 to 128 g/m2)).
– 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally in the feeder.
Original and Paper
– Do not add or remove originals while they
are being scanned.
– When scanning is complete, remove the
originals from the original output area (A)
to avoid paper jams.
– When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT
original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place
the original horizontally.
– The scanned originals are output to the
original output area in the order that they
are fed into the feeder.
– You can place different size originals
together into the feeder if you set the
Different Size Originals mode. (See chapter
3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)
– 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed
horizontally on the feeder.
2‑10
Paper Requirements
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table. Icons
indicating the type of paper loaded in stack bypass and each paper drawer can be displayed
on the paper select screen if you store that information in the machine beforehand. (See
“Register Paper Type,” on p. 12‑7.)
Paper Type
Original and Paper
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Source
Paper Drawer
Stack Bypass
Plain*1
Recycled*1
Color*1
3-hole punch*2
Bond*3
Transparency*4
Heavy Paper 1*5
Heavy Paper 2*6
Heavy Paper 3*7
Labels
Envelopes
*1 From 17 lb to 22 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2).
*2 Only LTR 3-hole punch paper can be used.
*3 From 20 lb to 24 lb bond (75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2).
*4 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.
*5 From 22 lb to 24 lb bond (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2).
*6 From 24 lb to 28 lb bond (91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2).
*7 From 28 lb to 32 lb bond (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2).
2‑11
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Source
Paper Size
Original and Paper
11" x 17"
Width x Length
11" x 17"
LGL
8 1/2" x 14"
LTR
8 1/2" x 11"
LTRR
11" x 8 1/2"
STMT
8 1/2" x 5 1/2"
STMTR
5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
EXEC
7 1/4" x 10 1/2"
Envelope
Irregular Size
2‑12
COM 10
4 1/8" x 9 1/2"
(104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)
Monarch
3 7/8" x 7 1/2"
(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
DL
4 3/8" x 8 5/8"
(110 mm x 220 mm)
ISO-B5
7" x 9 7/8"
(176 mm x 250 mm)
ISO-C5
6 3/8" x 9"
(162 mm x 229 mm)
3 3/4" x 5 7/8" to
11 3/4" x 17"
(95 mm x 148 mm to
297 mm x 432 mm)
Paper Drawer
1, 2
Stack Bypass
● To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2‑13
Original and Paper
Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Coated paper
Torn paper
Damp paper
Very thin paper
Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the
reverse side.)
● The following types of paper do not print well:
– Highly textured paper
– Very smooth paper
– Shiny paper
● Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
● Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
● Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in
their original packaging in a cool, dry location.
● Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
● Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use
Canon type transparencies with this machine.
● Each paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (22 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
● Note the following points when using the stack bypass:
– Paper Quantity: one to approximately 80 sheets (22 lb bond (80 g/m2), stack
approximately 3/8" (10 mm) high)
– Paper Size: 3 3/4" x 5 7/8" to 11 3/4" x 17" (95 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)
– Paper Weight: 18 to 32 lb bond (64 to 128 g/m2)
– Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow
the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass (allowable curl amount: less than
3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper). There are
some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be
fed into the stack bypass.
● You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper.
Printable Area
Original and Paper
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the
margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.
2‑14
Loading Paper
To load paper in the paper drawer, see “Set Up the Machine,” in the Starter Guide.
Into the Stack Bypass
If you are making prints on labels, transparencies, nonstandard paper size stock, or
envelopes, load the paper stock into the stack bypass.
– The paper in the stack bypass is fed prior to the paper in the paper drawer.
– The recommended envelopes are COM10 (#10), MONARCH, DL, ISO-B5, and ISO-C5. Using other envelopes
may affect the quality of the printout.
– When printing from a computer, make sure to set the correct paper size in the printer driver. (See the PCL
Driver Guide and the UFR II Driver Guide.)
– Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
– Depending on the type of heavyweight paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets of heavyweight
paper into the stack bypass, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load only one sheet of heavyweight paper at
a time.
– If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray.
Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
– Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
– For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
2‑15
Original and Paper
– If you are making two-sided prints, select the Two-sided mode. The printed paper may crease depending on
the moisture absorption condition of the paper, and if you copy the two pages as two one-sided documents.
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set
the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could
adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service
repair, or the paper could jam.
1
Open the stack bypass.
3
Load the paper into the stack
bypass.
Original and Paper
Make sure that the height of the paper stack
does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ).
If the paper size you are going to load into
the stack bypass is different from the paper
size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings,
set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to [Off]
in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See “Setting Paper Size
and Type for the Stack Bypass,” on p. 2‑21.)
2
When you use the stack bypass to make
copies, straighten out curled paper prior to
use, as shown below.
Adjust the slide guides (A) to
match the size of the paper.
Feeding Direction
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out
the auxiliary tray (A), and extend the tray
extension (B).
2‑16
Curled paper may cause a paper jam.
– If there is difficulty in straightening out
curled paper, curl the front edges of the
paper upward, as shown below.
– To print on the back side of preprinted
paper, load the preprinted paper face up
into the stack bypass, as shown in the
illustration below.
● If you are loading envelopes into
the stack bypass:
1 Take five envelopes, loosen them as
shown, and then stack them together.
2 Repeat this step five times for each set of
five envelopes.
Original and Paper
The screen for selecting the paper size
appears.
– When loading paper into the stack bypass,
align the paper stack neatly between the
slide guides. If the paper is not loaded
correctly, a paper jam may occur.
– If you are printing on heavyweight paper
or envelopes using the stack bypass, and
find that the paper or envelopes are not
being fed smoothly or evenly through
the stack bypass, remove the paper or
envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward
approximately 1/8" (3 mm), and then
reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the
feeding edges enables the rollers to grip
the paper or envelopes as they are fed into
the stack bypass.
– If there are instructions on the paper
package about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
– When the paper is loaded into the stack
bypass, the side facing down is the one
printed on.
– If problems, such as poor print quality or
paper jams occur, try turning the paper
stack over and reload it.
– For more information on the print direction
of preprinted paper (paper which has
logos or patterns already printed on it), see
“Loading Preprinted Paper,” on p. 2‑29.
3 Place the envelopes on a clean, level
surface, and press all the way around the
envelopes by hand, in the direction of
the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat
this step five times for each set of five
envelopes.
Take particular care to spread the
envelopes out in the direction that they
will be fed.
2‑17
4 Hold down the four corners of the
5 Load the envelopes, as shown below.
envelopes firmly, so that they and the
sealed or glued portion stay flat.
Original and Paper
Feeding
Direction
The screen for selecting the paper size
appears.
`
– Do not print on the back side of the
envelopes (the side with the flap (A)).
– If the envelopes become filled with air,
flatten them by hand before loading
them into the stack bypass.
– The stack bypass can hold 10 envelopes
at a time.
– Envelopes may be creased in the
printing process.
4
Specify the size and the type of the
paper you load.
For details on how to specify the paper size
and type, see “Setting Paper Size and Type for
the Stack Bypass,” on p. 2‑21.
The paper size/type setting in the [Stack
Bypass] setting screen is available if Stack
Bypass Standard Settings is set to [Off] in
Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). If Stack Bypass Standard
Settings is set to [On], copying can be
performed only for the registered paper size
and type. (See, “Setting Paper Size and Type,”
on p. 2‑19.)
2‑18
Setting Paper Size and Type
When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the
settings.
Setting Paper Type for the Paper Drawers
Be sure to correctly set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the
quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could
jam.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
3
2‑19
Original and Paper
This setting enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper source.
Once you specify this information, icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper
source appear on the paper select screen.
5
7
①
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
The registered paper type information is
displayed through the use of icons on the
paper select screen, as shown below.
Original and Paper
① Select the paper source in which you want
to register the paper type.
The numbers on the screen represent the
following paper sources:
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
6
①
②
① Select the desired paper type loaded in
the paper source.
② Press [OK].
Make sure that the registered paper type
setting is the same paper type that is
loaded in the paper source.
2‑20
Setting Paper Size and Type for the Stack Bypass
You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This setting is
useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack bypass.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
5
3
①
②
①
① Press [▼] until [Stack Bypass Standard
Settings] appears.
① Press [On].
② Press [Store].
6
Select the desired paper size.
2‑21
Original and Paper
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set
the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could
adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service
repair, or the paper could jam.
– If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy function, you must select the stack bypass
when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See “Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic
Drawer Switching,” on p. 2‑25.)
● If you want to select a standard
● If you want to select a
paper size:
nonstandard paper size:
1
1
①
Original and Paper
②
① Select the desired paper size.
② Press [Next].
To select an A or B series paper size, press
[A/B-size].
2
①
②
① Select the desired paper type.
② Press [OK].
– When printing on special types of
paper, such as heavyweight paper or
transparencies, be sure to correctly
set the paper type, especially if you
are using heavyweight paper. If the
type of paper is not set correctly, it
could adversely affect the quality of
the image. Moreover, the fixing unit
may become dirty and require a service
repair, or the paper could jam.
– If you select [Transparency] or [Labels],
make sure that you do not specify any
finishing modes (Collate, or Group).
– [Transparency] can be selected only if
[LTR] is selected as the paper size.
2‑22
2
①
②
③
① Press [X] to specify the horizontal axis
of the paper, then enter a value using
the numeric keys on the touch panel
display.
② Press [Y] to specify the vertical axis of
the paper, then enter a value using
the numeric keys on the touch panel
display.
③ Press [OK].
– If you make a mistake when entering
values, press [C] on the touch panel
display, then enter the correct values.
– You can enter only 2, 4, 8 or 16 as the
denominator.
– The value entered in inches is converted
to millimeters by the machine each time
it is entered. Thus, there may be a slight
difference between the value calculated
and the actual value entered.
– To enter values in millimeters, press
[mm].
– When entering the value in millimeters,
you can also use – (numeric keys),
and (Clear) to clear your entry.
– When entering the value in millimeters,
you can also change the value by
pressing [-] or [+] in increments of
1.0 mm, even if you have entered the
value.
– If you enter a value outside the setting
range, [OK] is grayed out and cannot be
selected. Enter an appropriate value.
– You can use values for [X] between 5
7/8" (148 mm) and 17" (432 mm), and
for [Y] between 3 3/4" (95 mm) and 11
11/16" (297 mm).
size:
1
Original and Paper
3
● If you want to select an envelope
2
①
②
4
① Select the envelope type.
② Press [OK].
①
– If the envelope type is not selected
correctly, a paper jam may occur.
– If you select [Envelope], you cannot use
the 1▶2-Sided, 2▶2-Sided, Book▶2Sided, 2-page Separation, or Image
Combination mode.
②
① Select the desired paper type.
② Press [OK].
– When printing on special types of paper,
such as heavyweight paper, be sure to
correctly set the paper type, especially
if you are using heavyweight paper. If
the type of paper is not set correctly,
it could adversely affect the quality of
the image. Moreover, the fixing unit
may become dirty and require a service
repair, or the paper could jam.
– If you select [Irreg. Size], you cannot use
the 1▶2-Sided, 2▶2-Sided, or Book▶2Sided mode.
3
[Transparency] can be selected only if
[LTR] is selected as the paper size.
2‑23
7
Original and Paper
8
2‑24
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
Useful Functions
You can use the following useful functions.
Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic Drawer Switching
– Paper sources set to [On] are used for the following functions:
– APS: The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper source) based on the original’s
size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).
– ADS: If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous print job, the machine automatically selects
another paper source with the same paper size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
3
2
①
① Press [▼] until [Drawer Eligibility For APS/
ADS] appears.
4
2‑25
Original and Paper
You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection (APS) and
Automatic Drawer Switching (ADS). This setting can be made independently for all the
different functions of the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use different
paper sources for different purposes.
5
7
①
Original and Paper
① Select [Copy], [Printer], [Receive], or
[Other].
6
①
②
① Select [On] or [Off] for the stack bypass
and the other paper sources.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Makes the paper source eligible for
APS/ADS.
[Off]: Makes the paper source ineligible for
APS/ADS.
The numbers on the screen represent the
following paper sources:
Stack Bypass
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
② Press [OK].
– Regardless of the stack bypass setting,
you cannot select [Off] for all of the paper
sources at the same time. At least one of
the paper sources, besides the stack bypass
must be set to [On].
– If you selected [Printer] in step 5, the Stack
Bypass icon ( ) will not be displayed on
the paper select screen in step 6.
2‑26
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
Paper Supply Indicator
The paper supply indicator (A) shows whether paper is loaded in each paper drawer.
appears on the Paper Select screen when paper is loaded in a paper drawer.
blinks
on the screen that appears when paper in a paper drawer has run out during printing. (See,
“Basic Copying Method,” on p. 3‑2.)
Original and Paper
The Paper Select Screen
A
The Screen When Paper Has Run Out
2‑27
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority
You can set the priority of print speed or print quality for each drawer.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
2
Original and Paper
①
②
① Set the priority of copy speed or copy
quality for each cassette.
② Press [OK].
6
3
①
① Press [▼] until [Paper Feed Method
Switch] appears.
4
2‑28
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
Loading Preprinted Paper
Use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos).
Original and Paper
– Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers, as this may cause paper jams:
– Paper on which color images have been copied (do not print on the reverse side either)
– If you want to print on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to print on:
– Face up when using a paper drawer
– Face down when using the stack bypass
2‑29
2‑30
Original and Paper
3
Copying
Copying
Basic Copying Method∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙3‑2
Paper Selection∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙3‑4
Scan Settings∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑10
Reserved Copy∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑19
Collate Copy∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑21
Two-Sided Copying∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑25
Confirming Settings∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑33
Changing/Canceling Selected Settings∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑34
Canceling Copy Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑35
Checking Copy Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 3‑37
Basic Copying Method
Follow this procedure to make a copy.
Place Your Originals
Copying
Enter the Copy Mode
Press
(COPY).
The COPY indicator lights up and the machine enters the
copy standby mode.
●
3‑2
You want to adjust the image quality,
density and copy ratio:
See “Scan Settings,” on p. 3‑10.
Place the original on the platen glass
or load it in the feeder.
For originals you can copy, see “Original Requirements,”
on p. 2‑2.
Enter the Copy Quantity
Start Copying
Copying
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
●
You enter a wrong number:
Press (Clear), and enter a new number.
Press
●
(Start).
You want to cancel copying:
Press (Stop).
3‑3
Paper Selection
Copying
You can manually specify a paper size or set the machine to automatically select the
paper size for you.
– If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper
at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy. For more
information on how much may be cut off, see “Scanning Area,” on p. 2‑4.
– If you select [Envelope], [Transparency], or [Labels], make sure that you do not specify any Finishing modes
(Collate or Group).
– If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [On],
and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See
“Stack Bypass Standard Settings,” on p. 12‑8.)
Automatic Paper Selection
The machine automatically selects the copy paper size.
– The Automatic Paper Selection mode is available only if the originals are fed from the feeder.
– The Automatic Paper Selection mode cannot be used with the Auto Zoom or Image Combination mode.
– You cannot use the Automatic Paper Selection mode when copying the following types of originals. Copy
these originals using the Manual Paper Selection mode.
– Nonstandard size originals
– Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
– Originals with an extremely dark background
– STMT or STMTR originals that are placed on the platen glass
– If Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off]
for a particular paper source, you cannot make copies on paper loaded in that paper source in the Automatic
Paper Selection mode. (See “Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS,” p. 12‑7.)
3‑4
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
3
Copying
4
①
②
① Press [Auto].
② Press [Done].
When the feeder is closed, the paper source
holding that paper size is highlighted along
with [Auto].
5
Press
(Start).
3‑5
Manual Paper Selection
You can make copies after manually selecting the paper size and type of paper loaded in
the paper sources.
Copying
You can copy an image onto envelopes, such as your company logo. Envelopes can be loaded into the stack
bypass.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
If you want to set the size/type for the paper
to be fed from the stack bypass, proceed to
step 5.
If you want to set the size/type for the paper
loaded in a paper drawer, proceed to step 3.
3
When the feeder is closed, the paper source
holding that paper size is highlighted along
with [Auto].
3‑6
4
①
① Select the desired paper size.
② Proceed to step 7.
– The paper sizes/types loaded in each paper
drawer are indicated by icons on the touch
panel display.
– Icons indicating the type of paper loaded
in each paper drawer can be displayed
on paper select screens, if you store that
information in the machine beforehand.
(See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference
Guide.)
– indicates that the paper is loaded
vertically, and indicates that the paper is
loaded horizontally. The suffix <R> (such as
in LTRR), used in paper size designations,
indicates that the paper is loaded in
a paper drawer or the stack bypass
horizontally.
5
For the stack bypass setting, load
the paper into the stack bypass.
2
①
②
① Select the desired paper type.
② Press [OK].
The paper size/type setting in the [Stack
Bypass] setting screen is available if Stack
Bypass Standard Settings is set to [Off] in
Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). If Stack Bypass Standard
Settings is set to [On], copying can be
performed only for the registered paper
size and type. (See “Stack Bypass Standard
Settings,” on p. 12‑8.)
● If you want to select a standard
paper size:
1
● If you want to select a
nonstandard paper size:
1
①
②
① Select the desired paper size.
② Press [Next].
To select an A or B series paper size, press
[A/B-size].
3‑7
Copying
– When printing on special types of paper,
such as heavy paper or transparencies,
be sure to correctly set the paper type,
especially if you are using heavy paper.
If the type of paper is not set correctly,
it could adversely affect the quality of
the image. Moreover, the fixing unit
may become dirty and require a service
repair, or the paper could jam.
– If you select [Transparency] or [Labels],
make sure that you do not specify any
Finishing modes (Collate or Group).
– [Transparency] can be selected only if
[LTR] is selected as the paper size.
– [3-hole punch] can be selected only if
[LTR] or [LTRR] is selected as the paper
size.
2
4
①
②
Copying
① Press [X] to specify the horizontal axis
of the paper, then enter a value.
② Press [Y] to specify the vertical axis of
the paper, then enter a value.
③ Press [OK].
① Select the desired paper type.
② Press [OK].
– When printing on special types of paper,
such as heavy paper, be sure to correctly
set the paper type, especially if you are
using heavy paper. If the type of paper
is not set correctly, it could adversely
affect the quality of the image.
Moreover, the fixing unit may become
dirty and require a service repair, or the
paper could jam.
– If you select [Irreg. Size] for copying, you
cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate
Group, 1 ▶ 2-Sided, 2 ▶ 2-Sided, Book
▶ 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, Image
Combination mode.
– If you make a mistake when entering
values, press [C] on the touch panel
display, then enter the correct values.
– To enter values in millimeters, press
[mm].
– If you enter values outside the setting
range, [OK] is grayed out and cannot be
selected. Enter an appropriate value.
– You can adjust values for [X] between 5
7/8" and 17", and for [Y] between 3 3/4"
and 11 11/16".
3
● If you want to select an envelope
size:
1
3‑8
2
①
②
① Select the desired envelope type.
② Press [OK].
Copying
– If the envelope type is not selected
correctly, a paper jam will occur.
– If an envelope size is selected, the
Finishing, 1 ▶ 2-Sided, 2 ▶ 2-Sided,
Book ▶ 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or
Image Combination mode cannot be
specified.
3
6
7
Press
(Start).
To cancel all settings and return the machine
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
3‑9
Copying
Scan Settings
You can set the desired copy exposure and select the original type before scanning
the original.
● Manual Exposure Adjustment
You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
● Original Type Selection
The machine is capable of processing and producing copies according to the type of
the original. You can manually select the original type so that the machine reproduces
copies as faithful as possible to the original. The following three original type modes are
available:
Text Mode
Text/Photo Mode
Photo Mode
– Text Mode
This mode is best suited for making copies of text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn
originals can also be copied clearly.
– Text/Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for making copies of originals containing both text and
images/photos, such as magazines or catalogues.
– Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic
paper, or making copies of images printed with halftone dots (i.e., printed photos).
● Automatic Exposure Adjustment
This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the exposure to the
level best suited to the quality of the original.
● Exposure Adjustment during Printing
You can change the copy exposure while the machine is printing.
3‑10
Original Type Selection
– Combinations of these three modes (Text, Text/Photo, and Photo) cannot be selected at the same time. If you
select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
– If you make copies of an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, using the Photo mode,
the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen the moiré effect by
using the Sharpness mode. (See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)
– If you select the Automatic Exposure Adjustment mode, the original type mode is grayed out and fixed to
Text mode. If you select the Text/Photo or Photo mode, the exposure can only be adjusted manually.
– If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate
level for the original.
Press
2
Place your originals.
5
(COPY).
3
① Press
Press
Copying
1
(Start).
To cancel all settings and return the machine
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
.
4
①
① Select the original type.
3‑11
Exposure
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original either automatically
or manually.
Copying
● Adjusting Automatically
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
3
The machine automatically adjusts the copy
exposure to the level best suited to the
quality of the original.
An automatic copy exposure adjustment
may not work with transparencies. In this
case, adjust the copy exposure manually by
pressing [Light] or [Dark].
4
Press
(Start).
To cancel all settings and return the machine
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
3‑12
● Adjusting Manually
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
3
Copying
①
① Press [Light] or [Dark].
Press [Light] to move the indicator to the
left to make the exposure lighter, or press
[Dark] to move it to the right to make the
exposure darker.
4
Press
(Start).
To cancel all settings and return the machine
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
3‑13
Copy Ratio
You can set the machine to adjust the copy ratio automatically, or you can specify the copy
ratio manually.
The following three types of copy ratio settings are available.
To set the copy ratio to 100%, press [Direct].
Copying
● Preset Zoom
The machine offers you a variety of preset copy ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size
originals to another standard paper size.
● Zoom by Percentage
You can reduce or enlarge originals by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The copy ratios
for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes are the same.
● Auto Zoom
You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate copy ratio based on the
size of the original and the selected copy paper. The copy ratios for the horizontal (X) and
vertical (Y) axes are the same.
Original
3‑14
Copy
● Preset Zoom
– Place the originals horizontally in the following cases:
– If you are enlarging LTR originals to 11" x 17"
– If you are enlarging STMT originals to 11" x 17"
– Placing an original horizontally means setting the original with the longer side sideways.
– If you are reducing 11" x 17" originals to LTR with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) set to [Off], load LTRR paper into a paper drawer or the stack bypass.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
(COPY).
4
①
②
① To reduce the original image, select
a preset reduction ratio. To enlarge
the original image, select a preset
enlargement ratio.
② Following your selection, press [Done].
3‑15
Copying
The machine offers you a variety of preset copy ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size
originals to another standard paper size.
● Reduction
The available preset copy ratios for reducing originals are:
– LGL → LTR (78%)
– 11" x 17" → LGL (73%)
– 11" x 17" → LTR (64%)
– MIN. (50%)
● Enlargement
The available preset copy ratios for enlarging originals are:
– MAX. (200%)
– LTR → 11" x 17" (129%)
– LGL → 11" x 17" (121%)
5
Select the paper size.
– If you set [Auto] for [Paper Select], the
machine selects the paper best suitable to
the selected ratio.
– If you copy highly transparent originals,
such as transparencies, the correct paper
size may not be selected.
Copying
6
Press
(Start).
– To return the copy ratio to 100%, press
[Direct].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
● Zoom by Percentage
You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy
ratios are from 50% to 200%. The same copy ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical
(Y) axes.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
3‑16
(COPY).
4
5
①
– If you set [Auto] for [Paper Select], the
machine selects the paper best suitable to
the selected ratio.
– If you copy highly transparent originals,
such as transparencies, the correct paper
size may not be selected.
②
6
Press
(Start).
– To return the copy ratio to 100%, press
[Direct].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
If you enter a value outside the setting
range, a message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
● Auto Zoom
You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate copy ratio based on
the size of the original and the selected copy paper. The same copy ratio is used for the
horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.
– You cannot use the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen with the Automatic Paper Selection mode.
– You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, using the Auto setting on the Copy
Ratio screen. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage mode instead.
– To use the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen, your originals must conform to one of the standard paper
sizes:
– 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT or STMTR (You can only place an STMTR original on the platen glass.)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
3
3‑17
Copying
① Press [-] or [+] to set a copy ratio.
② Press [Done].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter values, and (Clear) to clear your
entries.
You can change the value by pressing [-]
or [+], even if you have entered the value
using – (numeric keys).
Select the paper size.
4
7
Press
(Start).
①
②
① Select the desired paper size.
② Press [Done].
Copying
Make sure that you select a paper size other
than [Auto]. If you do not select a paper size,
the copy ratio is automatically set to match
the size of the paper loaded in Paper Drawer
1.
5
6
①
① Press [Auto].
② Press [Done].
3‑18
②
– To return the copy ratio to 100%, press
[Direct].
– To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio],
then [Auto].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Reserved Copy
You can set the machine to scan originals even while it is printing or waiting to
process a job.
– You can reserve up to five copy jobs, including the current job.
– You can set different copy modes and paper sources for each reserved job.
Reserving Copy Jobs
Copying
Reserved printing can be specified in the following cases:
● While the Machine Is Waiting
You can specify copy settings or scan originals while the machine is in the waiting state,
such as when after a paper jam is cleared. Copying automatically begins when the machine
is ready. The message <Reservation copies can be made.> appears on the touch panel
display when the machine is able to process reserved copying.
● While the Machine Is Printing
You can specify copy settings for a new job while the machine is printing. Copying of the
new job automatically begins when the current job is complete.
You can specify reserved copying while the machine is in the waiting state in the following cases:
– After a paper jam is cleared
– After a cover on the main unit is opened and closed
3‑19
1
4
Copying
Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that
appears while the machine is printing.
If the job displayed on the touch panel
display is from a function other than the Copy
function, press [Done], then press
(COPY)
to display the Copy Basic Features screen.
This part of the procedure is not necessary if
the machine is in the waiting state.
2
3
Place your originals.
Set the desired copy modes and
paper source.
To cancel a previously set copy mode, press
(Reset).
3‑20
Press
(Start).
If you specify a reserved copy job while the
machine is in the waiting state, copying
automatically begins when the machine is
ready.
If you specify a reserved copy job while the
machine is printing, copying of the new job
automatically begins when the current job is
complete. If the following screen is displayed,
press [OK], then try reserving the job again
after the current job is complete.
Collate Copy
The Finishing modes can be selected to collate the copies in various ways, either by
pages or copy sets.
The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Envelope], [Transparency], or [Labels] is selected as the paper type.
● If the Collate Mode Is Set:
Originals
1
2
Set 1
Three Copies
of Each Page
Collated in
Page Order
1
3
2
4
Set 2
1
3
2
4
Set 3
1
3
Copying
The copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The output is as
follows:
2
3
4
4
● If the Group Mode Is Set:
All copies of the same original page are grouped together. The output is as follows:
Originals
1
2
Three Copies
of Each Page
Grouped by
Page
Group 1
1
3
4
1
Group 2
2
1
Group 3
3
2
2
3
Group 4
4
3
4
4
● If No Finisher Mode Is Set:
If the Collate and Group modes are not set, copies are output as follows:
Originals
Copies
1
1
2
3
2
4
3
4
3‑21
If the Rotate Mode Is Set:
If the copies are of the same size, the sheets are automatically collated into sets arranged in
page order, and are output in alternating directions as follows:
1
Copying
1
1
2
3
1
4
Page Order (Collate)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
3
4
① Press [Collate].
② Press [OK].
If you want to rotate the output sheet,
press [Rotate] and proceed to step 5.
Otherwise, press [OK] and skip to step 7.
3‑22
5
6
7
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for
each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
① Select [A4], [A4R], [B5], [B5R], [LTR], or
[LTRR].
② Press [OK].
– To cancel this setting, press [Finishing],
then press [Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Copying
– [Rotate] can be selected only in the
following cases:
– If the available paper size is selected
manually
– If the available paper size is loaded
in both the horizontal and vertical
directions
– The selected paper source must have
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) set to [On]. (See
“Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS,” on
p. 12‑7.)
– When you have selected Automatic Paper
Selection for the Rotate mode, make sure
to select a paper size which can be rotated.
Otherwise, output will not be rotated.
– If there is no paper which can be rotated,
output will be collated.
Same Page (Group)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
3
3‑23
4
6
Copying
① Press [Group].
② Press [OK].
If you want to rotate the output sheet,
press [Rotate] and proceed to step 5.
Otherwise, press [OK] and skip to step 7.
① Select [A4], [A4R], [B5], [B5R], [LTR], or
[LTRR].
② Press [OK].
– [Rotate] can be selected only in the
following cases:
– If the available paper size is selected
manually
– If the available paper size is loaded
in both the horizontal and vertical
directions
– The selected paper source must have
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) set to [On]. (See
“Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS,” on
p. 12‑7.)
– When you have selected Automatic Paper
Selection for the Rotate mode, make sure
to select a paper size which can be rotated.
Otherwise, output will not be rotated.
– If there is no paper which can be rotated,
output will be collated.
5
7
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for
each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
– To cancel this setting, press [Finishing],
then press [Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3‑24
Two-Sided Copying
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided
originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.
● Making Two-Sided Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 ▶ 2-Sided)
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals.
Originals
Copy
● Making Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 ▶ 2-Sided)
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals. If the originals
are placed in the feeder, they are automatically turned over to make two-sided copies.
Original
Copy
3‑25
Copying
– You may not be able to make two-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
– If you are copying in the 2-Sided mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen
glass (by the arrow in the top left corner), or with the back edge of the feeder.
– The 2-Sided mode you have selected is displayed above [2-Sided] on the Copy Basic Features screen.
– Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
– Paper size: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC, STMTR (envelopes cannot be used for two-sided copying)
– Paper weight: 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2)
– If you select [Irreg. Size] for copying, you cannot use the 1 ▶ 2-Sided, 2 ▶ 2-Sided, Book ▶ 2-Sided, or 2-page
Separation mode. (See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)
– If you select [Envelope] for copying, you cannot use 1 ▶ 2-Sided, 2 ▶ 2-Sided, Book ▶ 2-Sided, 2-page
Separation mode. (See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)
● Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 ▶ 1-Sided)
This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make onesided copies on different sheets of paper.
Copying
Original
Copies
● Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book ▶ 2-Sided)
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages, or from the front and
back sides of a page in bound originals, such as books and magazines.
– Place your original on the platen glass. The Book to 2-Sided mode cannot be used when the original is placed
in the feeder.
– Left/Right Two-sided
This setting makes two-sided copies from facing pages.
Copies
Original
1
2
1
1
2
– Front/Back Two-sided
This setting makes two-sided copies from the front and back sides of a page.
Copies
Original
3‑26
1
2
2
1
1 to 2-Sided
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals.
– The 1 ▶ 2-Sided mode cannot be used with the Two-page Separation or Image Combination mode.
– If there are an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy is left blank.
– If the 1 ▶ 2-Sided mode is used with the Different Size Originals mode, the copies of different size originals
will be printed as one-sided copies on paper of their respective sizes. If you want to make two-sided copies
with different size originals, you must select the paper size beforehand. (See “Paper Selection,” on p. 3‑4.)
Press
2
Place your originals.
(COPY).
● To set the orientation of the two-
sided copies:
1
3
2
4
①
②
① Select the type of two-sided
orientation.
Details of each item are shown below.
[Book Type]: The front and back sides
of the copy will have the same topbottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back
sides of the copy will have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
② Press [Done].
3‑27
Copying
1
5
6
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for
each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Copying
– To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided], then
press [Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
2 to 2-Sided
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals. If a two-sided
original is placed in the feeder, it is automatically turned over so that both sides of the
original are copied on the front and back sides of a copy sheet.
The 2 ▶ 2-Sided mode cannot be used with the Two-page Separation or Image Combination mode.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
4
3‑28
(COPY).
● To set the orientation of the
originals and the copies:
1
2
①
5
②
6
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for
each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
– To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided], then
press [Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
2 to 1-Sided
This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make onesided copies on different sheets of paper.
– The 2 ▶ 1-Sided mode cannot be used with the 2-page Separation or Image Combination mode.
– Make sure to place originals, such as LTRR, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of
the copy is printed upside down.
1
2
Press
(COPY).
3
Place your originals into the
feeder.
3‑29
Copying
① Select the type of two-sided orientation
for the originals and the copies.
Details of each item are shown below.
Original
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of
the original have the same top-bottom
orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back
sides of the original have opposite topbottom orientations.
Copy
[Book Type]: The front and back sides
of the copy will have the same topbottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back
sides of the copy will have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
② Press [Done].
4
5
● To set the orientation of the
originals :
Copying
1
Press
(Start).
– To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided], then
press [Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
2
①
②
① Select the orientation of the originals.
Details of each item are shown below.
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of
the original have the same top-bottom
orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back
sides of the original have opposite topbottom orientations.
② Press [Done].
3‑30
6
Book to 2-Sided
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages, or from the front and
back sides of a page in bound originals, such as books and magazines.
– The Book ▶ 2-Sided mode cannot be used with the 2-page Separation, Image Combination, Binding Erase, or
Different Size Originals mode.
– Only LTR paper can be used for Book ▶ 2-Sided copying.
– If you select [Front/Back Two-sided], the front side of the first two-sided page and the back side of the last
two-sided page are left blank.
– Place your original on the platen glass. The Book ▶ 2-Sided mode cannot be used when the original is placed
in the feeder.
2
Press
(COPY).
Copying
1
4
Place your original on the platen
glass.
①
3
① Press [Book ▶ 2-Sided].
② Press [Next].
5
To make copies in the correct page order,
begin copying from the first open page of the
book or bound original.
Place your original face down, making sure
that its top edge is aligned with the back
edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the
top left corner).
①
②
① Select the desired type of two-sided
layout.
Details of each item are shown below.
[Left/Right 2-sided] : The facing pages of a
book or bound original are copied on the
front and back sides of a single sheet of
paper.
[Front/Back 2-sided]: The front and back
sides of the left page, or the front and
back sides of the right page, are copied on
the front and back sides of a single sheet
of paper.
② Press [OK].
3‑31
6
Press
(Start).
To copy the next two facing pages, turn the
page of the original. Place your original on
the platen glass, then press (Start).
Copying
7
– To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided], then
press [Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3‑32
Confirming Settings
Copy mode settings that you have specified, including those that are set from the
Special Features screen, are all grouped together onto one screen so you can easily
check them.
1
Copying
2
①
②
① Check the settings.
② Press [Done].
A right triangle (▶) on a copy mode setting
key indicates that more setting screens are
available by pressing the key.
3‑33
Changing/Canceling Selected Settings
You can use the Setting Confirmation screen to change or cancel selected copy modes.
1
3
Change or cancel the selected copy
mode (for example, Sharpness).
● To change a copy mode:
Copying
1
①
2
②
①
① Perform the same steps used for setting
the mode. Change the setting as you
desire.
② Press [OK].
● To cancel a copy mode:
① Press the key of the copy mode to be
changed or canceled.
1
– A right triangle (▶) on a copy mode setting
key indicates that more setting screens are
available by pressing the key.
– If you select a copy mode setting key
without a right triangle (▶) and then
press [Done], the selected copy mode is
canceled.
4
3‑34
Canceling Copy Jobs
You can cancel a job using the touch panel display or System Monitor screen, or by
pressing (Stop).
Using the Touch Panel Display
You can cancel a copy job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being copy.
Copying
1
Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that
appears while the machine is scanning,
printing, or waiting to print.
If you cancel a copy job during scanning,
make sure to remove the original for that job.
3‑35
Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a copy job while it is waiting to be processed or during printing.
Copying
1
– If the job that you want to cancel is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel
them all at once. You may only select and
cancel one job at a time.
5
2
The message <Canceling...> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
3
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No
Good) on the Log screen.
6
4
①
②
① Select the copy job that you want to
cancel.
② Press [Cancel].
3‑36
Press [Done].
Checking Copy Jobs
System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the copy jobs currently being
processed.
Checking the Status of Copy Jobs
4
Copying
1
②
①
① Select the job whose detailed information
you want to check.
② Press [Details].
2
If the job that you want to check is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
3
5
6
Check the details of the selected
job.
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Copy Basic Features screen
appears.
3‑37
3‑38
Copying
4
Sending
Documents
Sending Documents
Basic Sending Method∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙4‑2
Scan Settings∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑16
Specifying Destinations∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑32
Manual Sending∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑52
Direct Sending∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑54
Job Recall∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑56
Storing/Editing Address Book∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑57
Canceling TX Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑90
Checking TX Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 4‑94
Basic Sending Method
Follow this procedure to send faxes.
Place Your Originals
Sending Documents
Enter the Send Mode
Press
(SEND).
The Send Basic Features screen appears.
Place the original on the platen glass
or load it in the feeder.
For documents you can send, see “Original
Requirements,” on p. 2‑2.
For sending jobs to e-mail, I-fax, or file server addresses, see “Sending an E-Mail
Message (imageCLASS MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑4, “Sending an I-Fax (imageCLASS
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑8, or “Sending a Job to a File Server (imageCLASS MF7480
Only),” on p. 4‑11. (Sending documents via e-mail, I-fax, or sending to a file server is
available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.)
For advanced sending features, see Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the
Reference Guide.
4‑2
Specify the Destination
Send the Document
Sending Documents
Specify the fax number using
– (numeric keys).
You can also specify the fax number using the Address
Book, one-touch buttons, or favorites buttons. (See
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.)
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the
instructions on the touch panel display, then press
(Start) once for each original. When scanning is
complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the
specified destination when scanning is complete.
●
You want to cancel sending:
Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that
appears while the machine is scanning, or
press (Stop).
To cancel a job while it is being sent or
waiting to be sent, see “Canceling TX
Jobs,” on p. 4‑90.
●
You enter a wrong number when
specifying a fax number:
Press (Clear) to clear your entry.
●
You want to specify scan settings:
Press [Scan Settings], then select a scan
setting from the pop-up menu. (See “Scan
Settings,” on p. 4‑16.)
4‑3
Sending an E-Mail Message (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
You can scan an original and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You can add
the document’s name, a subject line, message body text, reply-to address, and e-mail
priority. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file.
Sending Documents
.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
(SEND).
①
5
①
②
① Enter the name of the document (up to 24
characters) that you want to send.
② Press [OK].
②
① Specify the e-mail address.
② Press [Send Settings].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4
4‑4
– You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your
entry.
– When you are sending documents, each
page is sent as a separate image attached
to an e-mail message, and the extension
of the document matches the file format
that you select for sending. The file name
prefix of the image attached to the e-mail
message is assigned as follows:
– If you set the document’s name:
The file name prefix is generated by the
document’s name, transaction number,
and four digits that signify the page
number of the image.
Example: document name_1004_0001.tif
– If you do not set the document’s name:
The file name prefix is generated by the
transaction number and four digits that
signify the page number of the image.
Example: 1004_0001.tif
– If you set the file format to [TIFF], [PDF],
or [PDF (Compact)] while both Divide
into Pages and Divided TX over Max.Data
Size are set to [Off], the four-digit number
which indicates the page number is fixed
to <0001>.
8
6
9
①
① Enter the message body text (up to 140
characters).
② Press [OK].
②
① Enter the subject (up to 40 characters) of
the e-mail message.
② Press [OK].
– You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your
entry.
– If you do not enter a subject, the default
subject set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings is used.
(See “E-mail/I-Fax Settings,” on p. 12‑38.)
– A hard return is counted as one character.
– You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your
entry.
10
4‑5
Sending Documents
7
11
12
13
① Press the E-mail Priority drop-down list.
①
①
②
Sending Documents
②
① Select the reply-to address.
② Press [OK].
– You need to store reply-to addresses in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/
Editing Address Book,” on p. 4‑57.)
– If the desired reply-to address is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired reply-to address.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– You can also specify a fax number as the
reply-to address.
– You cannot select multiple destinations at
the same time.
– To cancel a selected reply-to address, press
[Reply-to], then [Cancel].
– To view the detailed information of a
selected reply-to address, select the
address, then press [Details].
4‑6
① Select a priority for your e-mail message.
② Press [Done].
14
15
Sending Documents
① Select a file format for sending your
document.
② If you want to separate multiple images
and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press
[Divide into Pages].
If you want to send multiple images as a
single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages].
③ Press [Done].
For instructions on setting the file format,
see “Setting the File Format (imageCLASS
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑14.
16 Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
4‑7
Sending an I-Fax (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax
can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can add the
document’s name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address.
Sending Documents
The following conditions are always selected:
– Paper Size: LTR
This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient’s machine can receive sizes other than LTR.
Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.
– File Format: TIFF
– Resolution: B&W 200 x 100 dpi or B&W 200 x 200 dpi
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
(SEND).
4
①
5
①
②
① Specify the I-fax address.
② Press [Send Settings].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
②
① Enter the name of the document (up to 24
characters) that you want to send.
② Press [OK].
– You can also use –
enter numbers, and
entry.
4‑8
(numeric keys) to
(Clear) to clear your
– When you are sending documents, each
page is sent as a separate TIFF image
attached to the I-fax. The file name prefix of
the image attached to the I-fax is assigned
as follows:
– If you set the document’s name:
The file name prefix is generated by the
document’s name, transaction number,
and four digits that signify the page
number of the image.
Example: document name_1004_0001.tif
– If you do not set the document’s name:
The file name prefix is generated by the
transaction number and four digits that
signify the page number of the image.
Example: 1004_0001.tif
– If you do not enter a subject, the default
subject set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings is used.
(See “E-mail/I-Fax Settings,” on p. 12‑38.)
8
9
① Enter the message body text (up to 140
characters).
② Press [OK].
7
①
– A hard return is counted as one character.
– You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your
entry.
10
②
① Enter the subject (up to 40 characters) of
your I-fax.
② Press [OK].
– You can also use –
enter numbers, and
entry.
(numeric keys) to
(Clear) to clear your
4‑9
Sending Documents
6
11
12
13
14 Press
①
Sending Documents
②
① Select the reply-to address.
② Press [OK].
– You need to store reply-to addresses in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/
Editing Address Book,” on p. 4‑57.)
– If the desired reply-to address is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired reply-to address.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– You can also specify a fax number as the
reply-to address.
– You cannot select multiple destinations at
the same time.
– To cancel a selected reply-to address, press
[Reply-to], then [Cancel].
– To view the detailed information of a
selected reply-to address, select the
address, then press [Details].
4‑10
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
Sending a Job to a File Server (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
You can send a job to any computer that acts as a file server on the network. You can add
the document’s name and message body text. The scanned document can be sent as a
JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
5
①
②
①
① Enter the name of the document (up to 24
characters) that you want to send.
② Press [OK].
②
① Specify the file server’s destination.
② Press [Send Settings].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4
– If you use characters such as “,”, “/”, “[”, or
“]” in the document name, you may not
be able to send the file to file servers that
run on operating systems that do not
recognize such characters.
– You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your
entry.
4‑11
Sending Documents
3
(SEND).
Sending Documents
– When you are sending documents, each
page is sent as a separate image and
stored in a file server. The extension of the
document matches the file format that you
select for sending. The file name prefix of
the image attached to the document you
are sending is assigned as follows:
– If you set the document’s name:
The file name prefix is generated by
the document’s name, the transaction
number, and the four digits that signify
the page number of the image.
Example: document name_1004_0001.tif
document name_1004_0001.pdf
document name_1004_0001.jpg
– If you do not set the document’s name:
The file name prefix is generated by the
transaction number and the four digits
that signify the page number of the
image.
Example: 1004_0001.tif
1004_0001.pdf
1004_0001.jpg
– If you set the file format to [TIFF], [PDF],
or [PDF (Compact)] while both Divide
into Pages and Divided TX over Max.Data
Size are set to [Off], the four-digit number
which indicates the page number is fixed
to <0001>.
7
②
① Enter the message body text (up to 140
characters).
② Press [OK].
– A hard return is counted as one character.
– You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your
entry.
– When you are sending documents to a file
server, the characters entered in [Message]
is sent as a text file. However, if you do not
enter characters in [Message], only the
image file is sent to the server without a
text file.
8
6
9
4‑12
①
10
Sending Documents
① Select a file format for sending your
document.
② If you want to separate multiple images
and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press
[Divide into Pages].
If you want to send multiple images as a
single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages].
③ Press [Done].
For instructions on setting the file format,
see “Setting the File Format (imageCLASS
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑14.
11 Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
4‑13
Setting the File Format (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
Sending Documents
You can select [TIFF], [PDF], [JPEG], or [PDF (Compact)] as the file format when sending
documents to an e-mail address or a file server.
When sending multiple documents to an e-mail address or file server, each page can be
sent as a separate file.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
①
(SEND).
②
① Specify the destination.
② Press [File Format].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4
① Select a file format for sending your
document.
File Formats:
[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
This file format is available only when you
scan the document in the B&W mode.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format.
This file format is available only when you
scan the document in the B&W mode.
[JPEG]: Sends the file in the JPEG format.
This file format is available only when you
scan the document in the Color mode.
[PDF(Compact)]: Enables you to send files
containing text originals or text/photo
originals using a high compression ratio.
This file format is available only when you
scan the document in the Color mode.
If you select [PDF (Compact)] as the file
format, it is recommended that you set the
original type setting to either [Text/Photo]
or [Text], depending on the image type.
② If you want to separate multiple images
and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press
[Divide into Pages].
If you want to send multiple images as a
single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages].
③ Press [Done].
– If you select [JPEG] as the file format, Divide
into Pages is automatically set to [On].
4‑14
– If you select [PDF (Compact)] as the file
format, the Color mode is set to [Color]
and the resolution is set to [300 x 300 dpi]
automatically, and the original type setting
is disabled.
– The color mode and resolution you can
set differ depending on the file format
you select. Follow the instructions on the
screen.
– To view a JPEG file, a software application
that supports the JPEG format is required.
– To view a TIFF file, a software application
that supports the TIFF format (such as
Imaging for Windows) is required.
– To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe
Acrobat Reader is required.
Press
Sending Documents
5
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
4‑15
Scan Settings
You can specify the scan settings to match the original you are sending.
Sending Documents
Selecting a Scan Mode
The machine has three preset scan modes:
– B&W 200 x 200 dpi, B&W 300 x 300 dpi, and Color 300 x 300 dpi (for the imageCLASS
MF7480)
– 200 x 200 dpi (Fine), 200 x 400 dpi (SuperFine), and 400 x 400 dpi (UltraFine) (for the
imageCLASS MF7470/MF7460)
Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes according to the type of original
you are sending.
– If the destination is a fax number or I-fax address, the original is always scanned and sent in B&W mode.
– If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a low-resolution mode.
– In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the favorites buttons. (See
“Storing/Editing Favorites Buttons,” on p. 4‑86.)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
3
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Select a scan mode.
4‑16
– For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
– The following combinations of file format
and preset scan modes are not available.
If you select them, a message asking for
your confirmation to change the file format
appears on the screen when you press
(Start).
– [PDF (Compact)] or [JPEG] as the file
format and [B&W 200 x 200 dpi] or [B&W
300 x 300 dpi] as the scan mode.
– [TIFF] or [PDF] as the file format and
[Color 300 x 300 dpi] as the scan mode.
– [Color 300 x 300 dpi] is not available when
sending faxes or I-faxes.
– To change the Scan mode settings, select
[Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down
list, and adjust the settings.
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
Sending Documents
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4‑17
Changing the Color Mode (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
Sending Documents
The following two color modes are available: Color and B&W (black and white).
● Color
The Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in color or
black-and-white.
● B&W
The B&W mode always scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in
color or black-and-white.
– If the destination is a fax number or I-fax address, the original is always scanned and sent in B&W mode.
– If you select the Color mode and select JPEG as the file format, you can select 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, or 300 x 300 dpi as the resolution.
– If you select the Color mode and select PDF (Compact) as the file format, 300 x 300 dpi is available as the
resolution.
– If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.
– If you select the B&W mode, you can select TIFF or PDF as the file format, and 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi,
200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi as the resolution.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
3
4
①
②
① Press [Color] or [B&W].
② Press [OK].
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4‑18
– If [TIFF] or [PDF] is selected as the file
format, and you select [Color] as the color
mode, and then press [OK], a message
asking for your confirmation to change the
file format appears on the screen.
– If [JPEG] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected
as the file format, and you select [Color]
as the color mode, and then press [OK],
a message asking for your confirmation
to change the file format appears on the
screen.
5
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
Sending Documents
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4‑19
Document Size
You can specify the document size before scanning originals whose size you need to
manually specify, such as transparencies.
Sending Documents
– You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of these documents
manually.
– Nonstandard size originals
– Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
– Originals with an extremely dark background
– STMT or STMTR originals that are placed on the platen glass
– When using Direct Sending for sending a fax, if you place the originals in the feeder, the Document Size
Select setting you specified is disabled.
– If you specify the document size, you cannot use the Stamp or Different Size Originals mode.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
4
3
5
①
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
②
① Select the document size.
② Press [Done].
To select an A or B series paper size, press
[A/B-size].
4‑20
6
7
Press
(Start).
Sending Documents
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4‑21
Resolution
Sending Documents
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The following combinations of color mode and resolution are available:
– B&W (TIFF and PDF)
150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x
600dpi
– Color
100 x 100 dpi (JPEG), 150 x 150 dpi (JPEG), 200 x 100 dpi (JPEG), 300 x 300 dpi (JPEG and
PDF (Compact))
– The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi is 11" x 17". If the image
exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
– If you send a long original at a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi, the periphery of the original image may cut off
slightly.
– If you are sending documents by fax, the maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x
400 dpi is 11" x 17".
– If you are sending documents by fax, select B&W 200 x 100 dpi, B&W 200 x 200 dpi, B&W 200 x 400 dpi, or
B&W 400 x 400 dpi. Otherwise, the document will be sent with poor resolution.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
3
②
①
③
① Press [Resolution].
② Select the desired resolution.
③ Press [OK].
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4‑22
4
– If you select [PDF (Compact)] as the file
format, the Color mode is set to [Color]
and the resolution is set to [300 x 300 dpi]
automatically, and the original type setting
is disabled.
– The color mode and resolution you can
set differ depending on the file format you
have selected. Follow the instructions on
the screen.
5
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
Sending Documents
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4‑23
Scan Density and Original Type Settings
You can set the scan density and select the original type before scanning the original.
● Manual Density Adjustment
You can manually adjust the scan density to the most appropriate level for the original.
Sending Documents
If you select the Color mode, you should manually adjust the scan density.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
4
①
3
②
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
① Press [Light] or [Dark] to adjust the scan
density.
Press [Light] to move the indicator to the
left to make the density lighter, or press
[Dark] to move it to the right to make the
density darker.
② Press [OK].
5
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4‑24
● Automatic Density Adjustment
The machine automatically adjusts the scan density to the level best suited to the quality
of the original.
– If you select the Color mode, automatic density adjustment cannot be used.
– If you set the automatic density adjustment, the original type setting is disabled.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
5
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
①
②
① Press [A].
② Press [OK].
The machine automatically adjusts the scan
density to the level best suited to the quality
of the original.
4‑25
Sending Documents
3
An automatic scan density adjustment may
not work with transparencies. In this case,
adjust the scan density manually by pressing
[Light] or [Dark].
● Original Type Selection
Sending Documents
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are
scanning.
The following three original type modes are available for adjusting the image quality.
● Text Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals
can also be scanned clearly.
● Text/Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos.
● Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo
originals containing halftones (e.g., printed photos).
– Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you
select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
– If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré
effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen the moiré effect by adjusting the
scanning contrast (sharpness). (See “Sharpness,” on p. 12‑13.)
– If you have selected [PDF (Compact)] as the file format, this setting is disabled.
– If you select the automatic density adjustment mode, the original type setting is disabled.
– If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the density to the most appropriate level
for the original.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
(SEND).
3
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4
①
① Specify the destination.
4‑26
① Press the original type drop-down list.
6
① Select the original type ([Text/Photo],
[Photo], or [Text]).
The machine automatically adjusts the scan
density to the level best suited to the quality
of the original.
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
①
②
① Press [Light] or [Dark] to adjust the scan
density.
Press [Light] to move the indicator to the
left to make the density lighter, or press
[Dark] to move it to the right to make the
density darker.
② Press [OK].
4‑27
Sending Documents
5
Press
Two-Sided Originals
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals placed in the feeder,
so as to scan each side separately.
Sending Documents
When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place
them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are
scanned upside down.
1
Press
2
Place your originals in the feeder.
(SEND).
5
①
3
②
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
① Select the type of original.
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of
the original have the same top-bottom
orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides
of the original have opposite top-bottom
orientations.
② Press [OK].
6
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4
7
Press
(Start).
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
4‑28
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Sending Documents
4‑29
Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to scan different size originals together.
Sending Documents
– The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used with the Document Size or Stamp mode.
– If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight
(paper type).
– Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder or the platen glass if you are placing
originals with different widths. (“Width” refers to the vertical measurement of the paper from the front of the
machine to the back of the machine when the paper is placed in the feeder or on the platen glass.)
– Set different size originals in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.
– 11" x 17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR
– If you place originals with different widths into the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the
scanning area. As a result, the images may be scanned as slanted.
– If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
4
3
5
①
① Specify the destination.
② Press [Scan Settings].
③ Press [Option].
For instructions on specifying destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.
4‑30
②
① Select the type of original.
If you are placing originals with the same
width, press [Same Width].
If you are placing originals with different
widths, press [Different Width].
② Press [OK].
6
7
Press
(Start).
Sending Documents
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan
Settings], then press [Option], then
[Cancel].
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4‑31
Specifying Destinations
This section describes how to specify a destination for a send job. You can select
a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or specify a new
address. You can also recall the destinations and settings stored in the favorites
buttons to check their contents, edit them, or delete them.
Sending Documents
A maximum of 501 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 501 destinations, one new
destination can be specified using the New Address tab.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several
destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
Using the New Address Tab
This section describes the procedure for specifying a new destination that has not been
stored in the Address Book.
– If Restrict New Addresses in System Settings is set to [On], you cannot specify a destination using the New
Address Tab. (See Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)
– The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is
sent.
– If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book
beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing Address Book,” on p. 4‑57.)
– You can specify only one destination at a time using the New Address tab.
– Sending documents to an e-mail, I-fax, or file server address is available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
– To view the detailed information of the destination, press [Details].
– You can edit an address specified from the New Address tab in the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See “Checking/Changing a Destination,” on p. 4‑49.)
– You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See
“Erasing a Destination,” on p. 4‑51.)
4‑32
● Specifying a Fax Number
This mode enables you to specify a new fax number.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
3
4
①
②
②
① Press [New Address].
② Press [Fax].
If no destination is displayed on the Send
Basic Features screen, you can skip this step.
4‑33
Sending Documents
①
① Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120
characters) using – (numeric keys), ,
and .
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several
seconds in the fax number you are
dialing. If you insert a pause within the
fax number, the letter <p> is displayed
between the numbers. If you insert a
pause at the end of the fax number, the
letter <P> appears.
When dialing an overseas number, insert
a pause after the country code, and at the
end of the fax number. (See “Pause Time,”
on p. 12‑15.)
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly
call an extension line that is connected to
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which
accepts only tone signals. If you press
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.
[◀][▶]: Press to move the position of the
cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the number
or character immediately to the left of the
cursor.
[Direct]: Press to use the Direct Send
mode. (See “Direct Sending,” on p. 4‑54.)
[Hook]: Press to use tone dialing or to send
a fax document manually. (See “Manual
Sending,” on p. 4‑52.)
② Press [OK].
Sending Documents
– You cannot insert a pause at the beginning
of a number.
– If you enter a pause at the end of the
number, the pause is always 10 seconds
long.
– You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
– If Confirm Entered Fax Numbers in Restrict
Access to Destinations in System Setting
is set to [On], you should enter the fax
number again for confirmation. Enter
the fax number you entered in step 2,
then press [OK]. (See Chapter 8, “System
Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)
4‑34
● Specifying an E-Mail Address (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
This mode enables you to specify a new e-mail address. You can enter the e-mail message
address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display.
If you send a document via e-mail, the document is sent as a file attached to an e-mail message in the Color or
B&W mode.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
You can also use –
enter numbers, and
entry.
(numeric keys) to
(Clear) to clear your
Sending Documents
3
②
①
① Press [New Address].
② Press [E-mail].
4
①
②
① Enter the e-mail address (up to 120
characters).
② Press [OK].
4‑35
● Specifying an I-Fax Address (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
This mode enables you to specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance and area,
I-fax helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You
can enter an I-fax address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display. You can
also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when using I-fax.
Sending Documents
The following conditions are always selected:
– Paper Size: LTR
This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient’s machine can receive sizes other than LTR.
Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.
– File Format: TIFF
– Resolution: B&W 200 x 100 dpi or B&W 200 x 200 dpi
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
3
4
①
②
②
① Enter the I-fax address (up to 120
characters).
② Press [OK].
①
① Press [New Address].
② Press [I-Fax].
4‑36
You can also use –
enter numbers, and
entry.
(numeric keys) to
(Clear) to clear your
● Specifying a File Server (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
This section describes the two methods for specifying a file server on the network as the
destination of a send job. You can use the keyboard or the Browse key if you select Windows
(SMB) as the server protocol.
4‑37
Sending Documents
– Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista restricts the number of users or clients that can be accessed. Once the
limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send documents to a file server using Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
– If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to [On], the Host Name and File Path of the file server
destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
– Set the following items when sending to a file server:
– Protocol
– Host Name
– File Path
– User
– Password
– For examples of the settings that are needed to send documents to a file server, see Chapter 6, “Network
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.
– You can use – (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
– If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server address specified in
imageWARE Gateway as the destination. By using imageWARE Document Manager and the send function
of the machine, you can manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more
information on the imageWARE Document Manager, see the imageWARE Gateway manual.
Sending Documents
■ Using the Keyboard
You can specify a file server as the destination directly from the keyboard displayed on the
touch panel display. Press [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and [Password] to specify the file
server settings.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
[FTP]: Select this protocol if you are sending
documents to a computer running Sun
Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet
Information Services 5.0 under Windows
2000 Server, Internet Information Services
5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet
Information Services 6.0 under Windows
2003 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0
under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if
you are sending documents to a computer
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
(SEND).
3
②
①
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server
protocol, you can specify the file server by
pressing [Browse]. For instructions on using
the Browse key, see “Using the Browse Key
(Windows (SMB)),” on p. 4‑41.
① Press [New Address].
② Press [File].
4
5
① Press the Protocol drop-down list.
① Select the desired protocol.
4‑38
6
①
8
②
②
① Enter the host name (up to 120
characters).
② Press [OK].
7
① Enter the file path (up to 120 characters).
② Press [OK].
– A file path is a series of characters that
signify the location of the folder. Specify a
folder in the file server as the destination of
the send job.
– If you are sending to an imageWARE
Document Manager folder, enter the folder
name set in imageWARE Gateway.
9
10
①
②
① Enter the user name (up to 24 characters).
② Press [OK].
If you are sending to an imageWARE
Document Manager folder, enter the user
name set in imageWARE Gateway.
4‑39
Sending Documents
A host name is a name assigned to a host
computer that provides services on the
Internet. A specific host name is assigned
to each host computer to identify it on the
Internet. In this entry box, enter the name
of the file server on the network as the
destination of the send job.
①
11
12
①
Sending Documents
②
① Enter a password (up to 24 characters
when [FTP] is selected as the server
protocol, or up to 14 when [Windows
(SMB)] is selected).
② Press [OK].
If you are sending to an imageWARE
Document Manager folder, enter the
password set in imageWARE Gateway.
13
4‑40
■ Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a
specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen. You can specify a file server from a
workgroup.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
5
3
After turning the main power on, you must
wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings
to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network
transmission is not possible until this startup
time has elapsed. (See Chapter 6, “Network
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the
Reference Guide.)
①
① Press [New Address].
② Press [File].
4
6
①
②
① Press the Protocol drop-down list.
① Select the desired workgroup.
② Press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired workgroup is not displayed,
press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
workgroup.
① Select [Windows (SMB)].
4‑41
Sending Documents
②
7
9
①
②
① Select the desired file server.
② Press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
● If the Enter Network Password
screen is displayed:
Sending Documents
① Press [User Name].
② Enter your user name (up to 24
characters), then press [OK].
③ Press [Password].
④ Enter your network password (up to 14
characters), then press [OK].
⑤ Press [OK].
⑥ Press [Down].
If the desired file server is not displayed, press
[▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired file server.
8
①
②
① Select the folder on the specified server to
which you want to send your documents.
② Press [OK].
To move down one level, press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired folder is not displayed, press
[▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired folder.
4‑42
Using the Address Book
The Address Book is a directory for storing destinations. A maximum of 500 destinations
(including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. Storing a destination in the Address
Book saves you the effort of entering frequently used destinations’ addresses each time you
send a job.
– To use this feature, destinations must be stored in the Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
Address Book,” on p. 4‑58.)
– Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See Chapter 7,
“Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.)
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”
on p. 4‑51.)
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
(SEND).
4
Sending Documents
1
①
②
① Select the desired destination from the
Address Book.
② Press [OK].
– You can select multiple destinations.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– If the desired destination is not displayed,
press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
destination.
– You can restrict the type of destinations
displayed in the result list by pressing the
Type drop-down list.
– You can display the destinations registered
in one-touch buttons by selecting Onetouch from the Type drop-down list.
4‑43
Sending Documents
– If the registered destination name is longer
than 15 characters, the first 15 characters
are displayed in the Name column in the
Address Book.
– To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
– To view the detailed information of a
selected destination, select the destination,
then press [Details].
4‑44
Using the One-Touch Buttons
You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch buttons. Follow the procedure below
to start a transmission and send a document with the press of a one-touch button.
– To use this feature, destinations must be stored in one-touch buttons beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing OneTouch Buttons,” on p. 4‑71.)
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”
on p. 4‑51.)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
3
4
①
②
① Select the desired one-touch button.
② Press [Done].
4‑45
Sending Documents
– You can select multiple one-touch buttons.
– Each one-touch button is assigned a threedigit number. If you know the one-touch
button’s three digit number, enter the
three digit number of the desired onetouch button using – (numeric keys).
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– To view the detailed information of a
selected destination, select the destination,
then press [Details].
– To cancel the selected one-touch button,
press [One-touch Buttons], then press the
selected one-touch button again.
Using Group Addresses
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address
Book or one-touch buttons. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several
destinations. You can register up to 499 destinations in one group.
Sending Documents
– To use this feature, group addresses must be stored in one-touch buttons or Address Book beforehand. (See
“Registering Group Addresses,” on p. 4‑67, or “Registering/Editing Group Addresses,” on p. 4‑81.)
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”
on p. 4‑51.)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
Specify a group address.
(SEND).
● To specify a group from the
Address Book:
1
2
①
②
① Select the destinations for the group
address.
② Press [OK].
– You can specify multiple groups at the
same time.
– To restrict the type of destinations
displayed in the result list, press the
Type drop-down list, then press [Group].
– To cancel a selected group, select the
group again to clear the check mark.
– To view the detailed information of a
selected group, select the destination,
then press [Details].
4‑46
● To specify a group from the one-
touch buttons:
1
2
①
Sending Documents
②
① Press the one-touch button containing
the group address.
② Press [Done].
To specify two or more groups, select
all of the desired one-touch buttons
containing the group address, then
press [Done].
To cancel a selected group destination,
press the one-touch button again.
4‑47
Using the Favorites Buttons
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same
destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify
the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored
document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
Sending Documents
– To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites
buttons. (See “Storing/Editing Favorites Buttons,” on p. 4‑86.)
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”
on p. 4‑51.)
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
– If the desired favorites button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired favorites button.
– You can manually change the recalled
settings from the selected favorites button
before you send your documents.
– If you press another favorites button, the
settings stored in that button are recalled.
– To cancel all settings and return the
machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
– If multiple destinations are stored
under the selected favorites button, the
destinations may not be listed in the order
in which they were set.
3
4
①
②
① Select the desired Favorites Button.
② Press [Done].
4‑48
Checking/Changing a Destination
You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your documents.
Only the destination specified using the New Address tab can be changed.
1
● If the destination has been
specified using one of the
sending methods in the New
Address tab:
①
②
1
Sending Documents
① Select the destination.
② Press [Details].
①
②
– If only one destination is specified, just
press [Details].
– If the destination that you want to check or
change is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲]
to scroll to the desired destination.
2
Check or change the destination’s
information.
● If the destination has been
specified using any method
other than New Address tab:
1
① Check or change the destination’s
information.
Change the destination’s information
in the same way that you specified it.
(See “Using the New Address Tab,” on
p. 4‑32.)
② Press [OK].
● If the destination is a group
address:
1
①
②
①
②
① Select one destination at a time.
② Press [Details].
① Check the destination’s information.
② Press [Done].
4‑49
2
①
②
① Check the destination’s information.
② Press [Done]
Sending Documents
3
4‑50
Erasing a Destination
You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your
documents.
1
Sending Documents
① Select the destination to be erased.
② Press [Erase].
– If only one destination is specified, just
press [Erase].
– If the destination that you want to check or
change is not displayed, press [▲] or [▼]
to scroll to the desired destination.
4‑51
Manual Sending
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a
fax document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive
automatically.
Sending Documents
– Manual Sending enables you to send a document consisting of two or more pages only if you use the feeder
to send it. You can only send one page at a time when you place your originals on the platen glass.
– If you cancel Manual Sending during transmission, the pages that have already been scanned are sent. You
can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing an Activity Report. (See “Printing
the Fax Job Log (Activity Report),” on p. 4‑96.)
– You cannot use group dialing for manual sending.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
5
3
① Press [New Address].
② Press [Fax].
4
You should hear the dial tone.
4‑52
– For instructions on specifying the scan
settings, see “Scan Settings,” on p. 4‑16.
– For instructions on setting the Stamp
mode, see Chapter 4, “Sending and
Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.
6
8
When you hear a high-pitched
tone, press (Start).
Scanning starts and the document is sent.
During the transmission, the transaction
number and page number are displayed in
the Job Monitor area.
① Specify the scan settings.
② Press [OK].
7
To cancel manual sending, press [Cancel].
<>
Sending Documents
① Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120
characters) using – (numeric keys).
② You can also specify the destination by
pressing [One-touch Buttons].
You can enter an extension number after
dialing the fax number.
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly
call an extension line that is connected to
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which
accepts only tone signals. If you press
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.
[One-touch Buttons]: Press to specify
destinations using the one-touch buttons.
(See “Using the One-Touch Buttons,” on
p. 4‑45.)
[Scan Settings]: Press to set the Scan
mode. (See “Scan Settings,” on p. 4‑16.)
– You cannot use group dialing for manual
sending.
– To cancel manual sending, press [End].
4‑53
Sending Documents
Direct Sending
This section describes the procedure for sending a fax with the Direct Sending mode.
● Memory Sending
All of the originals to be sent are first scanned and read into memory, then sent. This
means that you do not need to stay near the machine once the originals have been
scanned.
● Direct Sending
The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.
Although Direct Sending is slower than Memory Sending, you can use Direct Sending
when you need to send an urgent document ahead of other documents stored in
memory.
– The memory can hold a total of approximately 1,000 pages for sent and received documents.
– If the memory becomes full, delete unwanted received documents using the System Monitor screen. (See
Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
– With Direct Sending, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can
only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
– You can specify only one destination at a time for Direct Sending.
– Memory Sending is automatically set when using Delayed Send or when multiple destinations are specified.
– If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the Direct Sending mode, you can check how many pages
have been sent to the destination by printing the Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System
Monitor screen.
4‑54
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
3
Specify the destination.
(SEND).
7
For more information on specifying the
destination, see “Specifying Destinations,” on
p. 4‑32.
4
Specify the desired send options.
5
①
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
As soon as transmission is possible, the
original is scanned and sent while scanning is
taking place.
During transmission, the transaction number
and page number currently being sent are
displayed in the Job Monitor area.
If the transmission completes successfully,
the message <Sent OK> appears in the
message area for approximately two seconds.
After the original has been sent, Direct
Sending is canceled automatically.
To cancel transmission, press [Cancel]
(Stop). Scanning and transmission of
documents are canceled from the time you
cancel the transmission.
②
① Press [Direct].
② Press [Done].
If you specify the destination using
– (numeric keys) or New Address tab,
press [Direct] on the same screen.
4‑55
Sending Documents
For instructions on specifying the scan
settings, see “Scan Settings,” on p. 4‑16.
6
– To cancel Direct sending mode, press
[Direct] again.
– For instructions on setting the Delayed
Send or Stamp mode, see Chapter 4,
“Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference
Guide.
Job Recall
You can recall the last three destinations, scan settings, and send settings that have
been set, and then send your documents.
Sending Documents
– The machine considers any one of the following operations a send job:
– When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified, and the control panel
power switch, (Start), or (Reset) is pressed
– When the Auto Clear mode activates after the send settings are specified
– The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.
– The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the power is turned off.
1
Press
2
Place your originals.
(SEND).
– If there are more stored Send settings
than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
– You can change the settings for a recalled
send job.
– If there are multiple destinations stored
in Recall memory, the order of the
destinations shown in the list may not
correspond to the order in which they were
specified.
3
5
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass,
follow the instructions that appear on the
touch panel display, then press (Start) once
for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified
destination when scanning is complete.
4
①
②
① Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].
② Confirm the settings, then press [OK].
4‑56
Press
Storing/Editing Address Book
– Storing e-mail, I-fax, or file server addresses is available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
– By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
– Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if an e-mail address is registered in a group address, that
e-mail address and the group address are counted as two entries.
– You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the
Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
– If a password has been set for the Address Book, you must enter the password to enter Address Book Settings
menu. Enter the password with – (numeric keys), then press [OK].
– Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported
into the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see Chapter 7, “Remote UI (imageCLASS
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.
– For easy reference, print out the list of recipients registered in the Address Book or one-touch buttons. (See
Chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the Reference Guide.)
4‑57
Sending Documents
This machine provides you with various ways to specify the destination besides using
the numeric keys. You can register fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and
file server addresses to the Address Book. Once you have registered destinations, you
can specify the destinations in the following ways:
● Using the Address Book (p. 4‑43)
You can specify destinations by pressing [Address Book] and selecting destinations
from the Address Book. You can store up to 500 destinations (including 200 one-touch
buttons) in the Address Book.
● Using the One-Touch Buttons (p. 4‑45)
You can specify destinations by pressing [One-touch Buttons] and then the desired onetouch buttons. You can store up to 200 one-touch buttons.
● Using Group Addresses (p. 4‑46)
You can specify groups of destinations registered in the Address Book or one-touch
buttons. You can register up to 499 destinations in a group.
● Using the Favorites Buttons (p. 4‑48)
You can specify destinations by pressing [Favorites Buttons] and then the desired
favorites buttons. You can store up to 18 destinations with document settings.
Storing/Editing Address Book
● Registering Fax Numbers
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
2
Sending Documents
6
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
4‑58
①
②
① Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120
characters) using – (numeric keys), ,
and .
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several
seconds in the fax number you are
dialing. If you insert a pause within the
fax number, the letter <p> is displayed
between the numbers. If you insert a
pause at the end of the fax number, the
letter <P> appears. When dialing an
overseas number, insert a pause after the
country code, and at the end of the fax
number. (See “Pause Time,” on p. 12‑15.)
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly
call an extension line that is connected to
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which
accepts only tone signals. If you press
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.
[◀] [▶]: Press to move the position of the
cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the number
or character immediately to the left of the
cursor.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between
numbers.
9
10
Sending Documents
– You cannot insert a pause or a space at the
beginning of a number.
– If you enter a pause at the end of the
number, the pause is always 10 seconds
long.
– You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
② Press [Option] or [Next].
If you want to specify the sending speed,
type of call, and ECM TX settings, press
[Option] and proceed to step 7.
Otherwise, press [Next] and skip to
step 15.
If your document transmissions are slow in
starting, this may mean that the telephone
lines in your area are in poor condition. Select
a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps],
[14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].
①
7
②
8
① Select the type of call.
Select [Domestic] for dialing domestic
(local) telephone numbers. Select [Long
Distance (1)] if communication errors
frequently occur when you make overseas
calls (when the overseas telephone
number is registered in the Address
Book). If errors persist, try selecting [Long
Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].
② Press [OK].
①
②
11
① Select the desired sending speed.
② Press [OK].
4‑59
12
The first character you enter for the name is
used for sorting the destination list when you
press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on the
Address Book screen.
①
16 Press [Done] repeatedly until
②
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
① Select [On] or [Off].
② Press [OK].
Sending Documents
13
14
15
①
②
① Enter a name for the recipient of the fax
(up to 16 characters).
② Press [OK].
4‑60
● Registering E-Mail Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
2
6
①
Sending Documents
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
②
3
① Enter the e-mail address (up to 120
characters).
② Press [Next].
7
4
① Enter a name for the e-mail address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
4‑61
Sending Documents
8
4‑62
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Registering I-Fax Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
2
6
①
②
3
① Enter the I-fax address (up to 120
characters).
② Press [Next].
7
4
Sending Documents
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
①
②
① Enter a name for the I-fax address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
4‑63
Sending Documents
8
4‑64
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Registering File Server Addresses
If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to [On], the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination
may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
2
Sending Documents
6
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
① Press the Protocol drop-down list.
① Select the desired protocol.
4‑65
[FTP]: Select this protocol if you are sending
documents to a computer running Sun
Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet
Information Services 5.0 under Windows
2000 Server, Internet Information Services
5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet
Information Services 6.0 under Windows
2003 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0
under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if
you are sending documents to a computer
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
Sending Documents
7
① Set [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and
[Password].
② Press [Next].
For instructions on specifying each of the
settings for FTP and Windows (SMB), see
“Specifying a File Server (imageCLASS
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑37.
8
① Enter a name for file server address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
4‑66
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
9
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Registering Group Addresses
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 499 stored destinations
as a single destination.
If you want to store a group address, the destinations must be stored beforehand, such as fax numbers, e-mail
addresses, and file server addresses.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
Sending Documents
5
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
6
4‑67
7
9
①
②
① Select the destinations to store in the
group address.
② Press [OK].
Sending Documents
– To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– If the desired destination is not displayed,
press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
destination.
– You can restrict the type of destinations
displayed in the results list by pressing the
Type drop-down list.
– You can select a destination and
press [Details] to confirm the detailed
information related to the selected
destination. Press [Done] to return to the
previous screen.
8
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to add other
destinations.
To erase a destination, select a destination
from the group address list, then press
[Erase].
4‑68
10
①
②
① Enter a name for the group address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
11 Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Editing Address Details
You can change destination details as necessary.
1
Press
② Press [Edit].
The current settings for the selected
destination appear.
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
①
②
5
①
②
① Select the destination to be changed.
① Edit the address details.
You can only change the name of a
destination registered as a group address.
② Press [Next].
4‑69
Sending Documents
– You cannot edit multiple destinations at
the same time.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– If the desired destination is not displayed,
press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
destination.
– You can restrict the type of destinations
displayed in the results list by pressing the
Type drop-down list.
– You can select a destination and
press [Details] to confirm the detailed
information related to the selected
destination. Press [Done] to return to the
previous screen.
– If you select [All] in the Address Book dropdown list, the destinations stored in the
one-touch buttons are displayed. However,
you cannot edit these destinations. For
instructions on editing one-touch buttons,
see “Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons,”
on p. 4‑71.
6
①
②
① If necessary, edit the address name.
② Press [OK].
Sending Documents
– For instructions on setting fax numbers,
see “Registering Fax Numbers,” on p. 4‑58.
– For instructions on setting
e-mail addresses, see “Registering E-Mail
Addresses,” on p. 4‑61.
– For instructions on setting I-fax addresses,
see “Registering I-Fax Addresses,” on
p. 4‑63.
– For instructions on setting file server
addresses, see “Registering File Server
Addresses,” on p. 4‑65.
– For instructions on setting group
addresses, see “Registering Group
Addresses,” on p. 4‑67.
7
4‑70
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
You can store up to 200 destinations in the one-touch buttons. This section describes how
to store/edit the destinations with the one-touch button feature.
– If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to [On], the Host Name and File Path of the file server
destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
– Destinations stored in one-touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.
● Registering/Editing Fax Numbers
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
①
Sending Documents
1
2
②
① Select a one-touch button to store or
change.
② Press [Register/Edit].
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– You can also specify the one-touch
button’s number by entering the three
digit number of the desired one-touch
button using – (numeric keys).
– One-touch buttons that already have
destinations stored in them are displayed
with a black square (■) in the lower right
corner of the key.
– If you select a one-touch button that
already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
– If you register multiple destinations as a
group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the
group address is displayed.
4‑71
5
– You cannot insert a pause or a space at the
beginning of a number.
– If you enter a pause at the end of the
number, the pause is always 10 seconds
long.
– You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
② Press [Option] or [Next].
If you want to specify the sending speed,
type of call, and ECM TX settings, press
[Option] and proceed to step 7.
Otherwise, press [Next] and skip to
step 15.
If you select a one-touch button already
storing a destination, skip this step.
Sending Documents
6
①
7
②
① Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120
characters) using – (numeric keys), ,
and .
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several
seconds in the fax number you are
dialing. If you insert a pause within the
fax number, the letter <p> is displayed
between the numbers. If you insert a
pause at the end of the fax number, the
letter <P> appears. When dialing an
overseas number, insert a pause after the
country code, and at the end of the fax
number. (See “Pause Time,” on p. 12‑15.)
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly
call an extension line that is connected to
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which
accepts only tone signals. If you press
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.
[◀] [▶]: Press to move the position of the
cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the number
or character immediately to the left of the
cursor.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between
numbers.
4‑72
8
①
②
① Select the desired sending speed.
② Press [OK].
If your document transmissions are slow in
starting, this may mean that the telephone
lines in your area are in poor condition. Select
a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps],
[14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].
9
12
①
②
10
① Select [On] or [Off].
② Press [OK].
①
13
① Select the type of call.
Select [Domestic] for dialing domestic
(local) telephone numbers. Select [Long
Distance (1)] if communication errors
frequently occur when you make overseas
calls (when the overseas telephone
number is registered in the Address
Book). If errors persist, try selecting [Long
Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].
② Press [OK].
11
Sending Documents
②
14
15
①
②
① Enter a name for the recipient of the fax
(up to 16 characters).
② Press [OK].
4‑73
The first character you enter for the name is
used for sorting the destination list when you
press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on the
Address Book screen.
16
①
Sending Documents
②
① Enter a name for the one-touch button (up
to 12 characters).
② Press [OK].
17 Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
4‑74
● Registering/Editing E-Mail Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
5
If you select a one-touch button already
storing a destination, skip this step.
①
②
① Select a one-touch button to store or
change.
② Press [Register/Edit].
4‑75
Sending Documents
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– You can also specify the one-touch
button’s number by entering the three
digit number of the desired one-touch
button using – (numeric keys).
– One-touch buttons that already have
destinations stored in them are displayed
with a black square (■) in the lower right
corner of the key.
– If you select a one-touch button that
already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
– If you register multiple destinations as a
group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the
group address is displayed.
6
①
②
① Enter the e-mail address (up to 120
characters).
② Press [Next].
Sending Documents
7
①
②
① Enter a name for the e-mail address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
8
①
②
① Enter a name for the one-touch button (up
to 12 characters).
② Press [OK].
4‑76
9
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Registering/Editing I-Fax Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
5
If you select a one-touch button already
storing a destination, skip this step.
①
6
①
②
① Select a one-touch button to store or
change.
② Press [Register/Edit].
②
① Enter the I-fax address (up to 120
characters).
② Press [Next].
4‑77
Sending Documents
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– You can also specify the one-touch
button’s number by entering the three
digit number of the desired one-touch
button using – (numeric keys).
– One-touch buttons that already have
destinations stored in them are displayed
with a black square (■) in the lower right
corner of the key.
– If you select a one-touch button that
already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
– If you register multiple destinations as a
group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the
group address is displayed.
7
①
②
Sending Documents
① Enter a name for the I-fax address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
8
①
②
① Enter a name for the one-touch button (up
to 12 characters).
② Press [OK].
9
4‑78
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Registering/Editing File Server Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
5
If you select a one-touch button already
storing a destination, skip this step.
①
6
②
① Select a one-touch button to store or
change.
② Press [Register/Edit].
① Press the Protocol drop-down list.
4‑79
Sending Documents
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– You can also specify the one-touch
button’s number by entering the three
digit number of the desired one-touch
button using – (numeric keys).
– One-touch buttons that already have
destinations stored in them are displayed
with a black square (■) in the lower right
corner of the key.
– If you select a one-touch button that
already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
– If you register multiple destinations as a
group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the
group address is displayed.
8
①
②
Sending Documents
① Select the desired protocol.
[FTP]: Select this protocol if you are sending
documents to a computer running Sun
Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet
Information Services 5.0 under Windows
2000 Server, Internet Information Services
5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet
Information Services 6.0 under Windows
2003 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0
under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if
you are sending documents to a computer
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
7
① Enter a name for file server address (up to
16 characters).
② Press [OK].
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
9
①
①
②
②
① Set [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and
[Password].
② Press [Next].
For instructions on specifying each of the
settings for FTP and Windows (SMB), see
“Specifying a File Server (imageCLASS
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑37.
4‑80
① Enter a name for the one-touch button (up
to 12 characters).
② Press [OK].
10 Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Registering/Editing Group Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
4
5
If you select a one-touch button already
storing a group address, skip this step.
①
6
②
① Select a one-touch button to store or
change.
② Press [Register/Edit].
4‑81
Sending Documents
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– You can also specify the one-touch
button’s number by entering the three
digit number of the desired one-touch
button using – (numeric keys).
– One-touch buttons that already have
destinations stored in them are displayed
with a black square (■) in the lower right
corner of the key.
– If you select a one-touch button that
already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
– If you register multiple destinations as a
group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the
group address is displayed.
7
9
①
Sending Documents
②
8
4‑82
①
②
① Select the destinations to store in the
group address.
② Press [OK].
① Enter a name for the group (up to 16
characters).
② Press [Next].
– To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– If the desired destination is not displayed,
press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
destination.
– Only destinations that are already stored in
one-touch buttons can be selected as part
of a one-touch button group address.
– You can select a destination and
press [Details] to confirm the detailed
information related to the selected
destination. Press [Done] to return to the
previous screen.
The first character that you enter for the
name is used for sorting the address list when
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on
the Address Book screen.
10
①
②
① Enter a name for the one-touch button (up
to 12 characters).
② Press [OK].
11 Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Erasing Addresses
● Erasing Addresses from the Address Book
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
5
4
①
②
① Select the destination to be erased.
② Press [Erase].
To cancel erasing, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
4‑83
Sending Documents
– You cannot erase multiple destinations at
the same time.
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to
display the individual keys for each letter or
number. You can select a letter or number
to restrict the displayed range of entries.
Press [All] to return to the full address list.
– If the desired destination is not displayed,
press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
destination.
– You can restrict the type of destinations
displayed in the results list by pressing the
Type drop-down list.
– You can select a destination and
press [Details] to confirm the detailed
information related to the selected
destination. Press [Done] to return to the
previous screen.
– If you select [All] in the Address Book dropdown list, the destinations stored in the
one-touch buttons are displayed. However,
you cannot erase these destinations. For
instructions on erasing one-touch buttons,
see “Erasing One-Touch Buttons,” on
p. 4‑85.
Sending Documents
6
4‑84
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Erasing One-Touch Buttons
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
If a password has been set for the
Address Book, enter the password using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK] to
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See
Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference
Guide.)
3
5
4
①
To cancel erasing, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
②
① Select a one-touch button containing the
destination(s) you want to erase.
② Press [Erase].
6
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
4‑85
Sending Documents
– If the desired one-touch button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
– You can also specify the one-touch
button’s number by entering the three
digit number of the desired one-touch
button using – (numeric keys).
– Make sure that you verify the settings first
before you erase them.
– One-touch buttons that already have
destinations stored in them are displayed
with a black square (■) in the lower right
corner of the key.
– If you select a one-touch button that
already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
– If you register multiple destinations as a
group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the
group address is displayed.
Storing/Editing Favorites Buttons
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a favorites
button in memory. There are 18 favorites buttons and they can be assigned names for
increased convenience. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.
– The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.
– If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the
settings registered in the favorites button.
Sending Documents
● Registering/Editing a Favorites Button
1
2
Specify the send settings that you
want to register.
Press
5
(Additional Functions).
3
If the desired setting is not displayed, press
[▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired setting.
6
4
① Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18])
for registering the send settings.
② Press [Register/Edit].
– If the desired Favorites Button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired Favorites Button.
– Keys that already have settings stored in
them are displayed with a black square (■)
in the lower right corner of the key.
4‑86
7
10
①
②
– If you select a key that already has settings
stored in it, the settings are displayed.
– If there are more stored send settings than
are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
① Enter a name for line 1 (up to 10
characters).
② Press [Next].
11
①
②
① Enter a name for line 2 (if necessary) (up to
10 characters).
② Press [OK].
The message <Stored in memory.> appears
for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
– To cancel storing the settings, press [No].
– If you select a key that already has settings
stored in it, a screen appears asking
for your confirmation to overwrite the
previous settings appears. To overwrite the
setting, press [Yes]. To cancel overwriting
the settings, press [No].
– Two lines can be used for a favorites button
name.
– If you press [OK] without entering any
characters, the key name reverts to its
current name (default: M1 to M18).
12 Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
9
4‑87
Sending Documents
8
● Erasing a Favorites Button
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
①
2
Sending Documents
②
① Select a Favorites Button with the send
settings that you want to erase.
② Press [Erase].
A screen appears, asking for your
confirmation to erase the settings.
3
– If the desired Favorites Button is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired Favorites Button.
– Make sure to check the settings first before
erasing them.
– Keys that already have settings stored in
them are displayed with a black square (■)
in the lower right corner of the key.
4
6
If the desired setting is not displayed, press
[▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired setting.
4‑88
To cancel erasing the settings, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
– If there are more stored send settings than
are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
– Key names are not erased. For instructions
on changing a key name, see “Registering/
Editing a Favorites Button,” on p. 4‑86.
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Sending Documents
4‑89
Canceling TX Jobs
You can cancel a job using the touch panel display or System Monitor screen, or by
pressing (Stop).
Using the Touch Panel Display
You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being scanned.
Sending Documents
1
2
Remove your originals.
Using the Stop Key
You can cancel a send job by pressing
1
Press
2
Remove your originals.
4‑90
(Stop).
(Stop), while the job is being scanned.
Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a send job while it is being sent or waiting to be sent, or a fax receive job
while it is being received.
● Fax
1
2
5
3
If you do not want to cancel the job, press
[No].
The message <Canceling...> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
4
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No
Good) on the Log screen.
②
①
① Select the job that you want to cancel.
② Press [Cancel].
4‑91
Sending Documents
– If the job that you want to cancel is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel
them all at once. Select and cancel one job
at a time.
– If a job is in the process of being sent, it
may not be canceled even if you press
[Cancel].
– If you cancel a job during sequential
broadcasting, all of the destinations
following the one to which the document
is currently being sent will be canceled.
Sending Documents
6
4‑92
● E-Mail, I-Fax, or Sending to a File Server
1
2
5
3
If you do not want to cancel the job, press
[No].
The message <Canceling...> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
4
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No
Good) on the TX Job Log screen.
②
①
6
① Select the job that you want to cancel.
② Press [Cancel].
4‑93
Sending Documents
– If the job that you want to cancel is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel
them all at once. Select and cancel one job
at a time.
– If a job is in the process of being sent, it
may not be canceled even if you press
[Cancel].
– If you cancel a job during sequential
broadcasting, all of the destinations
following the one to which the document
is currently being sent will be canceled.
Checking TX Jobs
System monitor enables you to view the transmission results, and monitor the status
of the send jobs.
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs
Sending Documents
This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs.
– If Job Log Display in System Settings is set to [Off], [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
– The maximum numbers of jobs that are displayed are:
– TX Job Status screen: 70 jobs
– Log screen: 128 jobs
– When the maximum number of jobs that can be displayed is reached, the oldest job is deleted each time a
new job is added.
● Checking Fax Job Details
You can check the detailed information of any fax job, such as the destination and the date
and time the job was specified.
1
3
2
4
①
②
① Select the job whose detailed information
you want to check.
② Press [Details].
4‑94
– If the job that you want to cancel is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
– You can cancel TX jobs which are being
sent or waiting to be sent by pressing
[Cancel] in [TX Job Status]. For more
information, see “Using the System Monitor
Screen,” on p. 4‑91.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Sending Documents
6
Check the details of the selected
job.
4‑95
Printing the Fax Job Log (Activity Report)
You can print the Activity Report which includes the transmission’s start time, destination,
job number, transmission mode, number of pages, and transmission result.
Sending Documents
1
– Fax jobs sent from the fax driver are not
printed in the Activity Report.
– The Fax Job Log can be printed only if
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper (plain
or recycled paper) is loaded in the paper
sources whose settings in Other in Drawer
Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen)
are set to [On]. (See “Automatic Paper
Selection/Automatic Drawer Switching,” on
p. 2‑25.)
2
5
3
To cancel printing, press [No].
The Activity Report is printed.
6
4
4‑96
Checking the Status of Send Jobs (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
This section describes how to check/change the status of send jobs.
– If Job Log Display in System Settings is set to [Off], [TX Job Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
– Send jobs to e-mail, I-fax, and file servers can be checked.
– The maximum numbers of jobs that are displayed are:
– Job status screen: 70 jobs
– Job log screen: 128 jobs
– When the maximum number of jobs that can be displayed is reached, the oldest job is deleted each time a
new job is added.
● Checking Send Job Details
1
4
①
②
2
① Select the job whose detailed information
you want to check.
② Press [Details].
3
– If the job that you want to select is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
– You can cancel TX jobs which are being
sent or waiting to be sent by pressing
[Cancel] in [TX Job Status]. For more
information, see “Using the System Monitor
Screen,” on p. 4‑91.
5
6
Check the details of the selected
job.
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
4‑97
Sending Documents
You can check the detailed information of any send job, such as the destination and the
date and time the job was specified.
4‑98
Sending Documents
5
Receiving
Documents
Receiving Documents∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙5‑2
Canceling RX Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙5‑3
Checking RX Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙5‑5
Available Paper Sizes∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 5‑11
Receiving Documents
Receiving Documents
The following shows how the machine operates when it receives a fax or I-fax
document.
For advanced receiving features, see Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the
Reference Guide.
When documents are being
received, the Processing/Data
indicator on the control panel
flashes a green light.
Receiving Documents
1
– The Processing/Data indicator flashes or
maintains a steady green light even when
the machine enters the Sleep mode.
– The Error indicator flashes a red light when
either the amount of available memory
is low or paper needs to be loaded into a
paper drawer.
3
The document is printed.
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when
documents stored in memory are printed.
2
5‑2
When document reception is
complete, the Processing/Data
indicator on the control panel
maintains a steady green light.
This indicates that documents are
stored in memory.
– If there is no paper on which the received
document can be printed, the received
document is stored in memory.
– Documents which have been stored in
memory because the paper has run out,
are automatically printed when paper is
loaded into a paper drawer.
– If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator
flashes a red light.
Canceling RX Jobs
You can select and cancel a fax job that is currently being received.
1
2
5
3
If you do not want to cancel the job, press
[No].
The message <Canceling...> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
4
①
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No
Good) on the Log screen.
②
① Select the job that you want to cancel.
② Press [Cancel].
5‑3
Receiving Documents
– If the job that you want to cancel is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel
them all at once. Select and cancel one job
at a time.
– You cannot erase a document that is being
printed.
– If you select a document that is being
received, [Erase] changes to [Cancel],
enabling you to cancel receiving the
document.
Receiving Documents
6
5‑4
Checking RX Jobs
System monitor enables you to view the reception results, and monitor the status of
the receive jobs.
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs
This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs.
– The maximum number of received fax jobs that are displayed is 90 jobs.
– When the maximum number of jobs that can be displayed is reached, the oldest job is deleted each time a
new job is added.
1
3
2
4
Receiving Documents
● Checking Received Fax Job Details
①
②
① Select the job whose detailed information
you want to check.
② Press [Details].
If the job that you want to select is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
5‑5
5
Receiving Documents
6
5‑6
Check the details of the selected
job.
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking the Status of Receive Jobs (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
You can check the contents of received documents stored in memory as well as the status of
receive jobs.
– If Job Log Display in System Settings is set to [Off], [RX Job Report] is not displayed on the System Monitor
screen.
– Up to 128 documents for the total of send and receive jobs combined can be displayed on the job log
(Activity Report (RX)) screen.
● Checking Receive Job Details
You can check the detailed information of any received job, such as the destination and the
date and time the job was received.
3
2
4
Receiving Documents
1
①
②
① Select the job whose detailed information
you want to check.
② Press [Details].
If the job that you want to select is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
5‑7
5
Receiving Documents
6
5‑8
Check the details of the selected
job.
Press [Done] repeatedly until
the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
● Printing the Receive Job Log (Activity Report)
You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).
1
2
The Receive Job Log can be printed only if
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper (plain or
recycled paper) is loaded in the paper sources
whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility
For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) are set to [On].
(See “Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic
Drawer Switching,” on p. 2‑25.)
5
Receiving Documents
3
To cancel printing, press [No].
The Activity Report (RX) is printed.
6
4
5‑9
● Checking the Arrival of I-Fax Jobs
The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I-fax. However, you can check for the
arrival of an I-fax at any time by performing the procedure below.
1
4
2
Receiving Documents
To be able to use [Check RX I-Fax Job], you
must first set the POP (Post Office Protocol)
setting in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings
in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to [On], so that you
can receive documents using POP. (See
Chapter 6, “Network (imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.)
3
5‑10
5
Available Paper Sizes
When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that
has the same size paper as the received document. If all of the settings in Select
Cassette in RX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings are
set to [On], and paper of the correct size is not available, the machine automatically
selects a different paper size in the following order. The paper size is automatically
selected in the same order, even if paper runs out during printing.
Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents
11" x 17" → LGL* → LTR* → STMT x 2
LGL originals
LGL → LTR* → 11" x 17" → STMT x 3
LTR originals
LTR → LGL → 11" x 17"→ STMT x 2
STMT originals
STMT → LTR → LGL → 11" x 17"
* Received documents are automatically reduced or separated before being printed on the
paper size indicated.
– The order of paper selection may differ depending on the resolution set on the sending party’s machine.
– Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:
– Paper Sizes: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMTR
– Paper Types: plain or recycled
– You can specify any paper drawer to receive fax/I-fax documents. The default setting is [On], except for the
stack bypass.
– You can set the machine to reduce received documents by 75%, 90%, 95%, or 97% if the document is larger
than any of the available paper sizes. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
– You can change the order of paper selection. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference
Guide.)
– You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See Chapter 4, “Sending
and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
– Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.
5‑11
Receiving Documents
11" x 17" originals
5‑12
Receiving Documents
6
Printing
Printing Documents∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙6‑2
Canceling Print Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙6‑5
Checking Print Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙6‑7
Printing
Printing Documents
Follow this procedure to print a document from your computer.
Make sure that the printer driver is installed. To check if the driver is installed, see
“Installing Software,” in the Starter Guide.
For details on printer driver settings, see the PCL Driver Guide and the UFR II Driver
Guide.
How to display the print screen or items on the screen may vary depending on your application and/or OS.
Select the Printer
Printing
Start the Print Command
From an open document on an
application, click [File] > [Print].
Select the printer icon for the
machine ([Canon MF7400 Series UFRII
LT], [Canon MF7400 Series PCL5e]*1,
[Canon MF7400 Series PCL6]*1), then
click [Preferences] or [Properties] to
open the dialog box.
*1 Only for users of the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
6‑2
Adjust Preferences
Print the Document
Printing
After finished setting, click [OK].
Click [Print] or [OK].
●
You want to cancel printing:
See “Canceling Print Jobs,”on p. 6‑5.
6‑3
Printing
– Use the following figures as a guideline to decide whether paper should be specified as Plain Paper or Heavy
Paper.
– Plain Paper: 17 to 22 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2)
– Heavy Paper 1: 22 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2)
– Heavy Paper 2: 24 to 28 lb bond (91 to 105 g/m2)
– Heavy Paper 3: 28 to 32 lb bond (106 to 128 g/m2)
– Canon transparency film is recommended for printing on transparencies.
– Canon label paper is recommended for printing on labels.
– Heavy Paper (2, 3), Transparency, Labels, and Envelope cannot be printed using two-sided printing.
– Two-sided printing can use either the paper drawer or the stack bypass in sizes of 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR,
STMTR, EXEC, A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, JIS-B5R, and A5R.
– Two-sided printing can use paper within the following range:
– 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2)
– When printing on letterhead paper, or paper with a Logo (such as a cover sheet), please note the following:
– If the paper is fed from a paper drawer, the machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing
down.
– If the paper is fed from the stack bypass, the machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing up.
– When a job is being processed, the Processing/Data indicator blinks green.
6‑4
Canceling Print Jobs
You can cancel the current print jobs.
Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a print job while it is being print.
1
3
① Select the copy job that you want to
cancel.
If the job that you want to cancel is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
② Press [Cancel].
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel
them all at once. You may only select and
cancel one job at a time.
6‑5
Printing
2
4
5
The message <Canceling...> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No
Good) on the Log screen.
Printing
6
6‑6
Checking Print Jobs
System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the print jobs currently being
processed.
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is turned off, all
print jobs are erased from the memory.
Checking the Status of Print Jobs
You can check the details of copy and print jobs, such as the date and time the machine
received and processed the jobs, and the number of pages.
1
2
3
①
① Press [Status] or [Log].
6‑7
Printing
If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off], the following items
are not displayed on the System Monitor Screen:
– Copy, Send, Fax job logs, and Print job logs
4
②
① Select the job whose detailed information
you want to check.
② Press [Details].
If the job that you want to check is not
displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired job.
Printing
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No
Good) on the Log screen.
5
6
6‑8
Check the detailed information.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
7
Scanning
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Scanning to a Computer∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙7‑2
Switching the Scanner Online and Offline∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙7‑4
Canceling Scan Jobs∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙7‑7
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Scanning to a Computer
Follow this procedure to scan an original to your computer.
Make sure that Color Network ScanGear is installed. To check if Color Network
ScanGear is installed, see “Installing Software,” in the Starter Guide.
For details on the Color Network ScanGear settings, see the Color Network ScanGear
User’s Guide.
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Enter the Scan Mode
Press
SCAN
(SCAN).
The SCAN indicator lights up and the machine enters scan
standby mode.
7‑2
Place Your Originals
Place the first page on the platen
glass if you are not using the feeder.
For Originals you can fax, see “Original Requirements,”
on p. 2‑2.
Set Scan Function
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for
[Original Placement].
Start Scanning
Click the [Scan] button.
●
You want to cancel scanning:
During scanning, a dialog box showing
the scanning progress appears. To cancel
scanning, click the [Cancel] button in that
dialog box.
7‑3
Switching the Scanner Online and Offline
To start Color Network ScanGear and scan, first you must switch the scanner online.
Switching the Scanner Online
Switching the scanner online enables communications with other devices on the network,
and allows the scanner to receive data from the computer.
Follow the procedure below to switch the scanner online.
1
Press
SCAN
(SCAN).
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
2
When the following display appears, the
scanner is online.
7‑4
Switching the Scanner Offline
After scanning over the network, disconnect the scanner from the network by switching it
offline in order to use other functions.
The procedure for switching the scanner offline depends on whether or not scanning is in
progress.
You do not have to switch the scanner offline in order to use other functions while data is being transferred.
● Switching Offline When Scanning is not in Progress
1
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
When the following display appears, the
scanner is offline.
7‑5
● Switching Offline When Scanning is in Progress
1
2
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
After a few seconds, scanning is interrupted
and the following display appears, indicating
that the scanner is offline.
Press [No] to cancel if you decide not to
switch the scanner offline.
7‑6
Canceling Scan Jobs
Cancel an ongoing job as follows.
Using the System Monitor Screen
During scanning, a dialog box showing the scanning progress appears.
1
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
7‑7
7‑8
Scanning (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
8
PC Faxing
PC Faxing∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙8‑2
PC Faxing
PC Faxing
Follow this procedure to send a fax from your computer.
Make sure that the fax driver is installed. To check if the driver is installed, see
“Installing Software,” in the Starter Guide.
For details on fax driver settings, see the Fax Driver Guide.
How to display the print screen or items on the screen may vary depending on your application and/or OS.
Select the Fax
PC Faxing
Start the Print Command
From an open document on an
application, click [File] > [Print].
Select the fax icon ([Canon MF7400
Series (FAX)]), then click [Print] or
[OK].
●
8‑2
You want to adjust the fax properties:
Click [Preferences] or [Properties] and
adjust the settings.
Send the Document
Specify the name and fax number in
[Sending Settings], then click [Add to
Recipient List].
Click [OK] in the Fax Sending Settings.
PC Faxing
Set the Destination
●
You want to send a fax with a cover
sheet:
Click the [Cover Sheet] tab and set the
format for the cover sheet attachment.
●
You want to cancel sending a fax:
See “Using the System Monitor Screen,”
on p. 4‑91.
8‑3
8‑4
PC Faxing
9
Remote UI
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Remote UI∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙9‑2
Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Remote UI
Follow this procedure for Remote UI management.
For details, see Chapter 7, “Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only), in the
Reference Guide.
Prepare the Network
Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Set up the machine for use in a
network, then connect the machine
and the PC to your network router or
a hub.
For details, see “Set the Machine for Network Usage,” in
the Starter Guide.
9‑2
Startup
Start the web browser, enter the IP
address of the machine, then press
[Enter] on the keyboard.
Log on
Operate the Machine
I
Select the user mode, then click [OK].
Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Now you can manage the machine on
the web browser.
For details, see Chapter 7, “Remote UI (imageCLASS
MF7480/ MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.
9‑3
9‑4
Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
10
Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 10‑2
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 10‑12
Replacing the Cartridge∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 10‑14
Recycling Used Cartridges∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 10‑20
Consumables∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 10‑27
Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine
Note the following before cleaning your machine:
– Make sure no document is stored in memory, then turn off the main power switch
and disconnect the power cord.
– Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.
– Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can
stick to the components or generate static charges.
Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the
machine. These can damage the machine components.
Exterior
1
Maintenance
2
3
10‑2
Turn off the main power switch
and disconnect the power cord.
Wipe the machine's exterior
with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth
dampened with water or diluted
dishwashing detergent solution.
Wait for the machine to dry, then
reconnect the power cord and turn
on the main power switch.
Fixing Unit
If black streaks appear on the printed page, the fixing unit in the main unit may be dirty.
Should this occur, use the Fixing Unit Cleaning function to clean the fixing unit. The fixing
unit should also be cleaned each time the cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern
on LTR paper for cleaning the fixing unit.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
The cleaning paper is printed. You will use
this paper as the cleaning paper.
3
5
Open the stack bypass.
Maintenance
10‑3
6
Load the cleaning paper with the
printed side facing up, inserting
the white edge into the stack
bypass first.
9
While the fixing unit is being cleaned, the
screen below appears.
7
– Cleaning the fixing unit takes
approximately 100 seconds.
– The cleaning process cannot be canceled.
Please wait until it is completed.
The display returns to the Adjustment/
Cleaning screen.
Maintenance
① Select [LTR].
② Press [Next].
8
10
① Select [Plain].
② Press [OK].
11
The cleaning paper is printed.
10‑4
12 Load the cleaning paper with the
printed side facing down, inserting
the white edge into the stack
bypass first.
13 Repeat steps 7 to 9 to clean the
fixing unit.
14 Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
Discard the cleaning sheets after use.
Maintenance
10‑5
Scanning Area
Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.
● Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder
When cleaning the machine, first turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to
observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If the platen glass or the underside of the feeder is dirty, the original may not be scanned clearly, or the size of
the original may be detected incorrectly.
Clean the platen glass and the
underside of the feeder with a
cloth dampened with water, and
then wipe them clean with a soft,
dry cloth.
Maintenance
1
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as
this may damage the original or break the
machine.
10‑6
● Manual Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder,
this may be caused by pencil writing rubbing off the originals and onto the roller. Perform
this feeder cleaning procedures to clean the feeder scanning area, film, and rollers.
When cleaning the machine, first turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to
observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.
– If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or blemished print output.
– Spin the rollers while cleaning them.
1
Clean the rollers (a total of three
places) inside the feeder cover
with a cloth dampened with water.
Then wipe the area with a soft, dry
cloth.
3
4
Open the inner cover (A), holding it
by its front tab.
Maintenance
2
Open the feeder cover.
Clean the rollers (A) inside the
inner cover with a cloth dampened
with water. Then wipe the area
with a soft, dry cloth.
10‑7
5
Maintenance
6
Clean the transparent plastic part
of the inner cover with a cloth
dampened with water. Then wipe
the area with a soft, dry cloth.
8
Close the inner cover.
9
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
7
10‑8
Close the feeder cover.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Open the feeder.
Clean the feeder scanning area (A)
and the document feeding roller
(B), with a cloth dampened with
water. Then wipe the area with a
soft, dry cloth.
10 Close the feeder.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
● Automatic Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder,
clean the rollers of the feeder by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of paper through it.
It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
3
Maintenance
2
10‑9
4
① Place 10 sheets of blank LTR paper into the
feeder, then press [OK].
While the feeder is being cleaned, the
screen below appears.
Maintenance
5
10‑10
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
● Transfer Roller
If the backside of the printed paper is smudged, the transcription roller in the main unit
may be dirty. Should this occur, use the Transfer Roller Cleaning function to clean the
transcription roller.
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
4
2
While the transfer roller is being cleaned, the
screen below appears.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen appears.
10‑11
Maintenance
5
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
Originals can be stamped to indicate that they have been sent. Replace the stamp
cartridge when this mark is faint or no longer visible.
When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow ink to come in contact with your hands or clothing. If
ink gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.
Maintenance
1
2
Open the feeder cover, then open
the inner cover (B) by holding its
front tab for removing the old
stamp cartridge (A).
Remove the old stamp cartridge
using the tweezers.
Widen the tweezers if necessary.
10‑12
3
Insert a new stamp cartridge into
the feeder using the tweezers until
it clicks.
– Set the stamp cartridge so that the two
projections on the cartridge are aligned
with the hollows on the feeder.
– Be careful that the stamping surface of the
stamp cartridge does not protrude.
– Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or it
may cause paper jams.
4
Gently close the inner cover and
the feeder cover until it clicks.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Maintenance
10‑13
Replacing the Cartridge
When the machine runs out of toner, the following screen appears on the touch panel
display.
Maintenance
When this happens, remove the cartridge from the machine and slowly shake it
sideways to redistribute toner.
Reinstall the cartridge in the machine and print out a test page. If the error message
still appears, follow the instructions shown on the screen and replace the cartridge.
If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and
scanning originals, without replacing the cartridge immediately.
– Do not burn or throw used cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the
cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
– Do not store cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in
burns or a fire.
– When discarding used cartridges, put the cartridges in a bag to prevent the toner remaining inside the
cartridges from scattering, and dispose of them in a location away from open flames.
– Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels “CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact” on. They become
very hot during use.
– Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately.
– Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If toner gets onto your hands
or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water. Washing it off with warm water will set the toner, and
make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
–
–
–
–
When you are replacing a cartridge, be sure to use a cartridge designed for this product.
Do not replace cartridge until the message prompting you to do so appears.
Do not attempt to replace the cartridge while the machine is printing.
Complete instructions on how to replace the cartridge can be accessed by pressing [Previous] or [Next] on the
touch panel display.
– If the toner runs out during a print job, the machine will start printing the remaining pages automatically after
you replace the cartridge.
10‑14
1
Press the button on the left cover
of the main unit, and open the left
cover.
3
Rotate the unlock lever until it
clicks.
Make sure that the ▼ (down arrow) on the
lever is aligned with the ▲ (up arrow) of the
(Unlock) icon position before proceeding.
4
2
While grasping the handle of the
cartridge holder, pull the cartridge
holder out of the machine until it
stops.
Open the front cover.
Maintenance
10‑15
5
While grasping the handle of the
cartridge, remove the cartridge
from the cartridge holder.
Lift the cartridge straight up.
Maintenance
6
8
Remove the new cartridge from
the protective bag.
Save the protective bag. You may need it
later when you remove the cartridge from the
machine.
10‑16
7
9
Remove the desiccant bag and the
shipping tape.
Place the cartridge on a flat
surface, and remove only the short
shipping tape affixed on both
other sides of the cartridge.
Remove the packing materials.
10 Hold the cartridge, shake it gently
five or six times from side to side,
then back and forth to evenly
distribute the toner inside.
– Pull out the sealing tape completely
from the cartridge. If the sealing tape
remains in the cartridge, it may result in a
deterioration in print quality.
– Dispose of the sealing tape according to
local regulations.
12 Place the cartridge on a flat
surface, and remove the long
shipping tape affixed on both
sides of the cartridge.
11 Pull out the sealing tape
completely in the direction of the
arrow in the illustration below
while supporting the cartridge.
Pull the sealing tape straight out.
13 Remove the protective cover by
pulling its tab.
Maintenance
– If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully
or stopped at midpoint, toner may leak. If
toner gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse
it out immediately with cold water and
consult a physician.
– If loose toner comes into contact with your
skin or clothing, wash with cold water.
Warm water will set the toner.
10‑17
14 While grasping the handle of the
new cartridge, insert the cartridge
into the cartridge holder.
Use only the cartridge recommended for use
in this machine.
15 While grasping the handle of
16 Rotate the lever to the locked
position.
Make sure that the ▼ (down arrow) on the
lever is aligned with the ▶ (right arrow) of
the
(Lock) icon position.
17 Close the front cover.
Maintenance
the cartridge holder, push the
cartridge holder in the machine as
far as it will go.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
10‑18
18 Gently close the left cover of the
main unit until it clicks by placing
your hand on the hand symbol
located on the left cover.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Maintenance
10‑19
Recycling Used Cartridges
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges
called “The Clean Earth Campaign”. This program preserves precious
natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the
used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new
cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner
by reducing landfill waste. Complete details concerning this program
are enclosed in each Cartridge box.
The Clean Earth Campaign
● THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM
The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth
Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas:
Maintenance
● Recycling in the Workplace
● Conserving Environmental Resources
● Scientific Research and Education
● Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation
The remaining “Clean Earth” initiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of
the National Park Foundation, the National Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy
and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The Nature
Conservancy of Canada.
10‑20
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount
of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities.
Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing
process, thus conserving an array of resources.
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further
use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.
● Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
● You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.
● This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.
Maintenance
10‑21
U.S.A. PROGRAM
● Packaging
■ Option A-1: Single Box Return
● Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from
the new cartridge’s box.
● Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
■ Option B: Volume Box Return
Maintenance
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
● Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.
Carefully seal the box with tape;
or
● Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.
10‑22
■ Option A-2: Multiple Box Return
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
● Complete Option A-1.
● Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications.
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)
Maximum length = 108 in. (2,743 mm)
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 in. (3,302 mm)
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special
shipping information.
Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or
service facility as provided in the warranty.
Maintenance
10‑23
● Shipping
Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska
and Hawaii Canon set up alternative mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.
■ Option: UPS Pick-up
● Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery;
Maintenance
or
● Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.
10‑24
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME
■ Option A: Single Box Return
● Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from
the new cartridge’s box.
● Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
● Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s
labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
● Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local
Canada Post outlet or franchise.
■ Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)
10‑25
Maintenance
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
● Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.
● The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.
● Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon
collection box. Seal the box.
● Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.
● Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
● Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial
pick-up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.
Working to preserve endangered species is a long-standing Canon interest.
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally
between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the Nature Conservancy of Canada. This
donation is utilized in Canada.
Maintenance
● For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write
to Canon.
1-800-667-2666
Canon Canada Inc.
Corporate Customer Relations
6390 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7
10‑26
Consumables
The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For more
information, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care
Center.
We recommend that you order the following consumables from Canon Authorized
Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center before your stock runs out.
● Paper Stock
In addition to plain paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and STMT), recycled paper, color paper,
transparencies (recommended for this machine), labels, and other types of paper stock are
available. For more information, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon
Customer Care Center.
– For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
– To prevent moisture build-up, tightly wrap any remaining paper in its original package for storage.
– Some commercially available paper types are not suited for this machine. Contact Canon Authorized Service
Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center when you need to purchase paper.
10‑27
Maintenance
Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite and result in burns or
a fire.
● Cartridge
If a message prompting you to replace the cartridge appears on the touch panel display,
replace the used cartridge with a new one.
When you are replacing a cartridge, be sure to use a cartridge designed for this product.
– Never dispose cartridges in a fire or incinerator, as this may result in an explosion.
– Do not store cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in
burns or a fire.
Keep cartridge and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a
physician immediately.
Maintenance
– Store cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended storage conditions are:
temperatures below 86°F (30°C), and humidity below 80%.)
– Never store the cartridges in a vertical position.
● Stamp Cartridge
The stamp cartridge is used to stamp originals. Use only the stamp cartridges
recommended for use on this machine.
10‑28
11
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 11‑2
Error Messages∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 11‑17
Error Codes∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 11‑21
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 11‑28
Service Call Messages∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 11‑29
If You Cannot Solve a Problem∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 11‑31
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs, the screen indicating the location of the paper jam and
instructions on how to clear the paper jam appears on the touch panel display. This
screen repeatedly appears on the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. A black circle on the screen indicates the location of the paper jam.
When you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes
and scanning originals, without removing the jammed paper immediately.
Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:
– Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
– Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See “Paper
Requirements,” on p. 2‑11.)
– Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.
– Make sure that the paper-size detecting lever located on the left side of a paper
drawer matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. (See “Set Up the
Machine,” in the Starter Guide.)
– There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper
or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to
touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
– The fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit,
the duplex unit, and their surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.
– When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the originals or
paper.
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or
injure yourself on the parts on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, please contact
Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.
11‑2
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the
jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to
prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into
your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
– After clearing all paper jams, remove your hands from the machine immediately. Even if the machine is not
in operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the feed rollers, which could result in personal
injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.
– Do not force a jammed original or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.
– When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue operating the machine. Follow the instructions
on the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. (See “Feeder,” on p. 11‑5.)
– If paper is jammed in several locations, remove the jammed paper in the order indicated on the touch panel
display.
1
Inspect all paper jam locations
indicated on the touch panel
display, and remove any jammed
paper.
– If the machine’s power is turned off when
there is a paper jam, detection of paper
jams in the paper drawers is not possible
after the power is turned back on. Clear
paper jams without turning the power off.
– Some areas that are shown to have paper
jams may not actually have paper jams.
However, always check all locations
indicated on the touch panel display in the
order that is given.
– When paper is jammed in several locations,
the following image with the black circles
appears on the screen.
① Feeder (See “Feeder,” on p. 11‑5.)
② Stack Bypass (See “Stack Bypass,” on
p. 11‑7.)/Fixing Unit (See “Fixing Unit
(Inside the Main Unit),” on p. 11‑8.)
③ Duplex Unit (See “Duplex Unit,” on
p. 11‑11.)
④ Paper Drawer 1 (See “Paper Drawer 1,” on
p. 11‑13.)
⑤ Paper Drawer 2 (See “Paper Drawer 2,” on
p. 11‑15.)
2
After you have removed all of the
jammed paper in the locations
indicated on the touch panel
display, restore all levers and
covers to their original positions.
11‑3
Troubleshooting
See the appropriate pages below for
instructions on finding and removing
jammed paper. Or, you can follow the
instructions on the touch panel display.
If jammed paper tears while it is being
removed, be sure to remove any remaining
pieces from inside the machine.
3
Continue to follow the procedure
and instructions on the touch
panel display.
Once you have cleared all of the jammed
paper in locations other than the feeder,
printing or copying resumes.
If there is paper that still needs to be
removed, a screen indicating how to clear
that paper jam appears on the touch panel
display. Repeat the procedure from step 1.
Troubleshooting
You do not have to re-enter the number
of copies or prints, even if you are printing
multiple sets. The machine automatically
recalculates the number of copies or prints
to make based on the number of sheets that
have jammed.
11‑4
Feeder
If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on
the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the
jammed paper.
Open the feeder cover.
2
Remove any jammed originals.
3
4
Open the inner cover (A), holding it
by its front tab.
Turn the feed dial and remove any
jammed originals.
Do not pull the jammed original forcefully.
Doing so may tear the original.
11‑5
Troubleshooting
1
If you cannot remove the original, proceed to
step 5.
5
7
Open the feeder and remove any
jammed originals.
Close the inner cover.
8
Close the feeder.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
6
Close the feeder cover.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Troubleshooting
9
Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
The screen indicating the location of the
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch
panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.
11‑6
Stack Bypass
If a paper jam occurs inside the stack bypass, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.
1
2
Remove all paper from the stack
bypass.
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
The screen indicating the location of the
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch
panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.
Troubleshooting
If you cannot remove the jammed paper,
follow the procedures described in “Fixing
Unit (Inside the Main Unit),” on p. 11‑8.
11‑7
Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit)
If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit area, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
1
Press the button on the left cover
of the main unit, and open the left
cover.
2
Push down the green fixing lever.
The parts located around the exit slot guide
and the fixing unit are subject to high
temperatures. When removing jammed
paper, take care not to touch anything in this
area except the lever.
11‑8
3
Use the green tab to lift up the exit
slot cover and remove any jammed
paper.
5
Remove any jammed paper that is
protruding from the lower part of
the fixing unit.
The parts inside the fixing unit are subject to
high-temperatures. When removing jammed
paper, take care not to touch anything in this
area, except the upper cover.
4
While holding down the lever on
the right corner of the fixing unit,
open the upper cover of the fixing
unit and remove any jammed
paper.
6
Push up the green fixing lever.
Troubleshooting
11‑9
7
Place your hand where the hand
symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then
gently close the left cover until
it clicks into place in the closed
position.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
8
Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
Troubleshooting
The screen indicating the location of the
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch
panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.
11‑10
Duplex Unit
If a paper jam occurs inside the duplex unit, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.
1
Press the button on the left cover
of the main unit, and open the left
cover.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
Some parts of the duplex unit are subject to
high temperature. When removing jammed
paper, take care not to touch anything in this
unit.
11‑11
When removing the jammed paper from the
bottom of the duplex unit, pull the jammed
paper slightly toward the inside. Do not pull
the jammed paper right below.
3
Place your hand where the hand
symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then
gently close the left cover until
it clicks into place in the closed
position.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Troubleshooting
4
Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
The screen indicating the location of the
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch
panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.
11‑12
Paper Drawer 1
If a paper jam occurs inside the paper drawer 1, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.
1
Press the button on the left cover
of the main unit, and open the left
cover.
Open the paper drawer’s left cover.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
2
11‑13
4
5
Pull out the paper drawer and
remove any jammed paper.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
7
Place your hand where the hand
symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then
gently close the left cover until
it clicks into place in the closed
position.
Gently push the paper drawer back
into the machine until it clicks into
place in the closed position.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Troubleshooting
8
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
6
11‑14
Close the paper drawer’s left cover.
Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
The screen indicating the location of the
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch
panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.
Paper Drawer 2
If a paper jam occurs inside the paper drawer 2, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.
Open the paper drawer’s left cover.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Pull out the paper drawer and
remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
1
11‑15
4
Gently push the paper drawer back
into the machine until it clicks into
place in the closed position.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Troubleshooting
5
Close the paper drawer’s left cover.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
6
Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
The screen indicating the location of the
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch
panel display until the paper jam is entirely
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.
11‑16
Error Messages
If the machine displays a self-diagnostic error message, follow the instructions on the
touch panel display.
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display when:
● scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
● you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning, copying, or
printing.
● you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only).
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible
causes and remedies.
Message
Description
Action
Cannot connect to the
specified IP address/port.
Check the Gateway Address
setting in IPv4 Address
Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See “Set the
Machine for Network Usage
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470
Only),” in the Starter Guide.)
Cannot find the selected
server. Check the settings.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
The IP address that the
machine should connect to
cannot be determined.
– Check the DNS (Domain
Name System) Server
Settings in TCP/IPv4 or v6 in
Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See
“Network (imageCLASS
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in
the Reference Guide.)
– Check whether the DNS
(Domain Name System)
server’s DNS settings are
correct.
11‑17
Troubleshooting
Cannot connect to the
selected server. Check the
settings.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
Message
Action
The machine and cable are not
connected properly.
Turn off the machine, check
that the machine is connected
to the network using the
proper cable, and then turn the
machine on.
Check the TCP/IP.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
The machine’s TCP/IP is not
operating.
Check the IP Address Settings
in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See
Chapter 6, “Network
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470
Only),” in the Reference
Guide or “Set the Machine for
Network Usage (imageCLASS
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the
Starter Guide.)
Check your document.
Paper or originals are jammed.
Remove any jammed paper or
originals. (See “Clearing Jams,”
on p. 11‑2, and “Feeder,” on
p. 11‑5.)
Load Paper.
– The machine has run out of
paper. No more prints can
be made.
– Load paper. (See “Set Up
the Machine,” in the Starter
Guide.)
– The paper drawer is not
inserted correctly.
– Insert the paper drawer
properly. (See “Set Up the
Machine,” in the Starter
Guide.)
Troubleshooting
Description
Check the cable.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
11‑18
Message
Action
The optimum paper size
selected by the Automatic
Paper Selection mode is not
available in the machine.
– Load the indicated paper
size into the machine. If you
press (Start) while this
message is displayed, prints
are made with the currently
selected paper size.
– When the message
continues to be displayed
even if the indicated paper
size is loaded, set Drawer
Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen)
for that paper drawer to
[On]. (See “Automatic Paper
Selection/Automatic Drawer
Switching,” on p. 2‑25.)
No response.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
– The server was not running
when you tried to send.
– Check the destination.
– The network connection
was lost when you tried to
send. (Either you could not
connect to the destination
or the connection was
lost before the job could
complete.)
– Check the status of the
network.
– A TCP/IP error occurred
when you tried to send an
e-mail or I-fax.
– Check that the network
cables and connectors are
properly connected.
No response from the server.
Check the settings.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
The specified server settings
are incorrect, or the server is
not turned ON. Alternatively,
the machine’s TCP/IP resources
may be low.
Wait for a while, and try
browsing again. If you still fail,
try selecting another server.
Out of resources. Wait for
a moment, then perform
operation again.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
You cannot browse the
Wait for a while, and try
network due to a lack of TCP/IP browsing again.
resources. This may be because
documents have just been
continuously sent or are being
continuously sent through FTP
or Windows (SMB).
11‑19
Troubleshooting
Description
LTR Load paper.
Message
Description
Action
Place the original on the
platen glass.
The specified mode requires
Place the original on the platen
that the original be placed on
glass.
the platen glass, but there is no
original on the platen glass.
Platen Glass is dirty.
The feeder’s scanning area is
dirty.
Clean the feeder’s scanning
area. (See “Manual Feeder
Cleaning,” on p. 10‑7.)
Remove the original from the The machine cannot scan your
feeder.
original using the feeder. An
original is placed in the feeder
and on the platen glass.
Remove the original from the
feeder.
Remove the paper from the
output tray.
Prints from the previous job
remain in the output tray.
Remove the prints remaining
in the output tray. Printing
automatically resumes.
Replace the toner.
Printing is not possible because Replace the cartridge. (See
the toner has run out.
“Replacing the Cartridge,” on
p. 10‑14.)
Return page 1 to the top, and Scanning was stopped due to a Arrange the originals in page
then press the Start key.
problem with the feeder.
order with the first page on
top. Place the originals back
into the feeder’s original supply
tray, and press (Start).
This machine is not set with an
IP address.
Specify the IP Address Settings
in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions
screen), then turn the
machine’s main power off and
back on again. (See Chapter
6, “Network (imageCLASS
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the
Reference Guide, or “Set the
Machine for Network Usage
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470
Only),” in the Starter Guide.)
There are too many
subdirectories.
You have exceeded the
maximum number of
subdirectory levels allowed.
The directory level that you
are trying to access cannot be
specified. Specify a different
destination.
Troubleshooting
Set the IP Address.
(imageCLASS MF7480/
MF7470 Only)
11‑20
Error Codes
If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and
perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can
check the error code on the Details screen when you press [Log] on the System
Monitor screen. (See “Checking Device Status,” on p. 1‑24.)
If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed
in the Results column on the Activity Report and TX Report. However, if a send job is
canceled, “STOP” is printed in the Results column on the TX Report.
Troubleshooting
For details on reports, see Chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the Reference Guide.
See the table below for individual error codes.
Error Code
Description
Action
#0001
A paper or originals may be jammed.
Remove the jammed paper or
originals.
#0003
– An attempt was made to send a
document of 17 1/8" (432 mm) or
longer from the feeder.
– Divide the document into smaller
parts and send from the platen
glass.
– A document takes a long time to
send because it contains too much
data.
– Reduce the scanning resolution
before sending.
– A document takes a long time to
receive.
– Contact the other party and ask
them to reduce their scanning
resolution or divide the document
into smaller parts for sending.
11‑21
Error Code
#0005
Description
– The recipient did not respond
within 35 seconds.
Action
– Send the document again. Contact
the other party and have them
check their fax machine. If you
are making an overseas call, add a
pause to the number.
– The other party may not be using a – Check with the other party and
G3 fax machine.
send the document to a G3 fax
machine. If the other party does
not have a G3 fax machine, try
sending your document using
a transmission mode the other
party's fax machine supports.
#0009
The paper has run out or the paper
drawer is not set properly.
#0012
You could not send because the other Contact the other party and ask them
party's fax machine is out of paper.
to load the paper.
#0018
– The recipient’s machine did not
respond when your machine
retried sending documents.
– Confirm that the recipient’s
machine is able to communicate,
and try again.
– The documents could not be sent
because the recipient’s machine
was busy.
– Confirm that the recipient’s
machine is able to communicate,
and try again.
– The settings on your machine do
not match the settings on the
recipient’s machine.
– Confirm that the recipient’s
machine is able to communicate,
and try again.
Load the paper or insert the paper
drawer properly.
Troubleshooting
– No pause was included in the
– Insert a pause after the country
telephone number when sending a
code, or after the fax number of
fax overseas.
the other party, and then dial the
number again.
– Change the Long Distance setting
on the Option screen if you are
sending documents to destinations
stored in the Address Book or
one-touch buttons. (See “Storing/
Editing Address Book,” on p. 4‑58,
or “Storing/Editing One-Touch
Buttons,” on p. 4‑71.)
#0037
11‑22
The memory is full.
Print, send, or delete any documents
stored in memory.
Error Code
Description
#0059
Your transmission is canceled
because the number you dialed was
different from the number registered
on the other party’s fax machine.
Action
#0701
The specified Department ID does not Enter the correct Department ID or
exist, or the password has changed.
password using – (numeric keys),
and try again. (See “Department/User
ID Management,” on p. 1‑17.)
Check to see that the correct fax
number is registered on the other
party’s fax machine.
The memory for image data is full
when sending color documents.
– Wait a few moments, and then try
sending again after other send jobs
are complete.
– Erase documents stored in
memory. If the machine still does
not operate normally, turn the
main power off, and then back on.
#0705
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
The send operation was interrupted
because the size of the image
data is larger than that specified in
Maximum TX Data Size set in E-mail/
I-Fax Settings in Communications
Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
– Change the setting for the
Maximum TX Data Size in E-mail/
I-Fax Settings in Communications
Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen).
– Select a lower resolution.
– If you are using I-fax, decrease
the number of pages containing
images that you are sending each
time, so that you do not exceed the
Maximum TX Data Size.
– Set Divide into Pages to [On] in the
File Format screen.
You could not execute the job
because a service call message is
being displayed.
Turn the main power off, wait for 10
seconds, and turn the main power
back on. If the machine still does not
work normally, turn the main power
off, disconnect the machine, and
contact Canon Authorized Service
Facilities or the Canon Customer Care
Center.
The server is not functioning. The
network is down (the server is unable
to connect to the network or was
disconnected).
– Check the recipient’s address.
– Check that the network is up.
#0749
# 0751
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
11‑23
Troubleshooting
#0703
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
Error Code
#0752
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
Description
Action
– The SMTP server name or POP
server name for e-mail or I-fax is
not correct, or the server is not
functioning.
– Check the SMTP server name,
domain name, POP server name,
and e-mail address in E-mail/I-Fax
in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
– The domain name or e-mail
address may not be set.
– Check that the SMTP server is
operating properly.
– The network is down.
– Check the network status.
#0753
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending Check the network cables and
an e-mail message. (Socket, Select
connectors. If the machine still does
error, etc.)
not operate normally, turn the main
power off, and then back on.
#0755
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
– You cannot send jobs because
TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.
– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen).
– The IP address is not set.
– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen).
Troubleshooting
– When the machine was turned on, – Check TCP/IP Settings in Network
an IP address was not assigned to
Settings in System Settings (from
the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or
the Additional Functions screen).
BOOTP server.
Or wait a while, and then try
sending again.
#0801
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
11‑24
– A timeout error occurred while the
machine was communicating with
the SMTP server to send an e-mail
message.
– Check that the SMTP server is
functioning normally, or check the
network status.
– The SMTP server returned an
error while trying to connect. The
destination is not correct. An error
occurred on the server side during
transmission to a file server.
– Check that the SMTP server is
functioning normally. Check
the network status. Check the
destination setting. Check the
status and setting of the file server.
Error Code
#0802
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
Description
Action
– Check the name of the SMTP
server or POP server in E-mail/IFax in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
– The DNS (Domain Name System)
server name is not correct.
– Check the settings in DNS (Domain
Name System) Server in IPv4
Settings or IPv6 Settings in TCP/
IP Settings in Network Settings
in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
– Connection to the DNS server
failed.
– Check that the DNS server is
functioning normally.
#0804
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have no permission to access the
folder.
Change the setting on the server to
enable access to the folder.
#0806
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
– An incorrect user name or
password was specified for the
sending of a file to a file server.
– Change the user name or
password.
– An incorrect destination was
specified for the sending of an
e-mail message or I-fax.
– Check the e-mail or I-fax address.
#0808
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
– A timeout error occurred while the
machine was communicating with
the FTP server.
– Check that the FTP server is
functioning normally, or check the
network status.
– The FTP server returned an error
while trying to connect. The
destination is not correct. An error
occurred on the server side during
transmission.
– Check that the FTP server is
functioning normally. Check
the network status. Check the
destination setting. Check the
status and setting of the file server.
#0810
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
– A POP server connection error
occurred when receiving an I-fax.
– The POP server returned an error
during the connection.
– A timeout error occurred on the
server while connecting to the POP
server.
Check the POP Server name in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). Confirm that the
POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
11‑25
Troubleshooting
– The name of the SMTP server
or POP server in E-mail/I-Fax
in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is not correct.
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Description
Action
#0812
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
The POP password setting is incorrect. Check the POP Server password in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
#0813
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
The POP Server name setting is
incorrect.
Check the POP Server name in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
#0816
You have reached the quota for the
number of pages you can copy or
print.
Reset or increase the page quota or
contact your system administrator.
#0818
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have received data that cannot
be processed (cannot print the
attached file).
Check the settings and ask the sender
to resend the data.
#0819
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have received data that cannot
be processed (MIME information is
incorrect).
Check the settings, and then ask the
sender to resend the data.
#0820
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have received data that cannot
Check the settings, and then ask the
be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is sender to resend the data.
incorrect).
#0821
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have received data that cannot
be processed (TIFF analysis error).
Check the settings, and then ask the
sender to resend the data.
#0827
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have received data that cannot
be processed (contains MIME
information that is not supported).
Check the settings, and then ask the
sender to resend the data.
#0828
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
You have received HTML data.
Ask the sender to use a file format
other than HTML, and then resend the
data.
#0829
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
Data containing more pages than
the machine can hold in memory is
received.
Print the received documents, and ask
the sender to resend the remaining
pages.
11‑26
Error Code
Description
Action
#0839
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
The user name or password for the
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)
in Authentication/Encryption in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is incorrect.
Check the user name and password
for SMTP Authentication (SMTP
AUTH) in Authentication/Encryption
in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
(See Chapter 6, “Network
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),”
in the Reference Guide.)
#0852
An error occurred because the main
power switch was turned off while a
job was being processed.
Check to see if the main power switch
is turned on. Try processing the job
again, if necessary.
Communication reservation is
cleared.
If necessary, try again from the
beginning.
#0995
(for the
imageCLASS
MF7480 only)
Troubleshooting
11‑27
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
If memory becomes full during the scanning of originals, the following screens appear
on the touch panel display.
The jobs may not be accepted even if <Avail. Memory> on the [Device] tab of the System Monitor screen has
not reached zero percent.
1
Troubleshooting
Scan the job again when the current job is
complete.
11‑28
Service Call Messages
If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, a screen like the
one shown below is displayed. Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel
display.
If a message like the one shown below appears, follow the procedure described
below.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
Always grasp the power plug portion when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may
expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could
cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.
11‑29
Troubleshooting
– Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is off.
– If the main power switch is turned off, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
– Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately
60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
1
If the machine still does not
operate normally, turn the main
power switch off, and then
disconnect the power cord from
the wall outlet. Contact Canon
Authorized Service Facilities or the
Canon Customer Care Center.
Troubleshooting
2
Turn the main power switch off.
Allow at least 10 seconds before
turning the main power switch
back on.
When contacting Canon Authorized Service
Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center,
check the following:
– Model name
– Problems and status of the machine
– Error code on the touch panel display
11‑30
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation. If
you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, or
if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or
the Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00
P.M. EST Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. For interactive
troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers to
frequently asked questions you can also visit our support site at www.canontechsupport.
com.
Customer Support (Canada)
11‑31
Troubleshooting
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
– For interactive troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and
answers to frequently asked questions (www.canon.ca)
– Automated interactive telephone support on most current products 24 hours, 7 days a
week (1-800-652-2666).
– Free live technical support 9:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding
holidays) for products still under warranty (1-800-652-2666)
– The location of the authorized service facility nearest you (1-800-652-2666) If the
problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair
options are available at the time of your call to the Free live technical support number
above or via the website at www.canon.ca
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.
Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:
– Product name
– Serial number: Press (Serial No.) to check your number.
– Place of purchase
– Nature of problem
– Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn off the main power switch immediately,
disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
Troubleshooting
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.
11‑32
12
Machine Settings
Machine Settings∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 12‑2
Additional Functions Menu∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 12‑6
Machine Settings
Machine Settings
You can adjust the machine settings from the Additional Functions Menu to customize
the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER'S DATA
LIST.
Printing USER'S DATA LIST
1
2
Machine Settings
3
4
12‑2
Press
(Additional Functions).
5
Accessing the Additional Functions Menu
– If User ID Management is set to [On], users whose user type is registered as “User” (end user) cannot change
the System Manager Settings even if there are no System Manager ID and System Password set.
– If User ID Management is set to [On], users whose user type is registered as “Administrator” can change the
System Manager Settings by entering the System Manager ID and System Password, or registering the System
Manager ID and System Password as their user information in advance.
– Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
2
① Select an Additional Functions setting.
3
Machine Settings
① Press a mode key to specify its settings.
For details on the setting items, see
“Additional Functions Menu,” on p. 12‑6.
4
When finished registering the
settings, press [Done] repeatedly
until the Basic Features screen
appears.
12‑3
Using the Printer Settings Menu
The Printer Settings menu enables you to access common features. Below is an abbreviated
outline of the Printer Settings menu structure. For a detailed description of all Printer
Settings menu options, see “Printer Settings,” on p. 12‑20.
As an example, the sequence of steps for setting the default number of copies is shown on
the following pages.
Depending on the printer personality, some settings are not available. For details on the availability of settings,
see “Printer Settings,” on p. 12‑20.
Settings
Printer Settings
Setting Value
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE
LTR
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE
LGL
COPIES
PCL SETTINGS
PAPER SAVE
ORIENTATION
Machine Settings
FONT NUMBER
91
RESET PRINTER
“
12‑4
0
” and “
” indicate that settings or levels are omitted.
1
Press
② Press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to
enter the value. (The numeric keys are not
available depending on the Printer Settings
item.)
You can change the value by pressing [◀] or
[▶], even if you have entered the value using
– (numeric keys).
If necessary, repeat this step to specify the
setting more precisely according to the
Printer Settings item you have selected.
You can return to the previous setting item
screen by pressing [Done].
The next setting item screen is displayed.
(Additional Functions).
2
3
① Press [◀] or [▶] to select <COPIES>.
6
4
7
Repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify all
the Printer Settings items you
want to set.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the
Basic Features screen is displayed.
Machine Settings
5
① Press [◀] or [▶] to specify the number of
copies.
12‑5
Additional Functions Menu
Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available.
Common Settings
Setting Item
Initial Function
Specifies the screen that is displayed when you turn on the
main power, or after the Auto Clear mode initiates. Copy
– Copy Basic Features screen
– Send Basic Features screen
– Scan Basic Features screen
– System Monitor screen
– Device status screen
Auto Clear Setting
Selects which screen appears after the Auto Clear mode
initiates.
Initial Function
Displays the screen selected in Initial Function.
Selected Function
Displays the screen of the current mode.
Audible Tones
Machine Settings
Description
Sets whether to sound audible tones.
Entry Tone
Beeps when pressing keys on the control panel or keys on
the touch panel display.
– On (1 to 3 levels)
– Off
Error Tone
Beeps when an error (e.g., paper jam) occurs.
– On (1 to 3 levels)
– Off
Send Done Tone
Beeps when a document is sent.
– On (1 to 3 levels)
– Off
Receive Done Tone
Beeps when a document is received.
– On (1 to 3 levels)
– Off
Print Done Tone
Beeps when printing is complete.
– On (1 to 3 levels)
– Off
Scan Done Tone
Beeps when scanning is complete.
– On (1 to 3 levels)
– Off
12‑6
Common Settings
Toner Save Mode
Selects the toner consumption for printing.
– High
– Low
– Off
* If the Toner Save mode is set to [High], print quality may be
affected. If you notice degradation in print quality, set this mode
to [Off].
Printer Density
Recalibrates the density adjustment scale if differences
between the image in the original and the print occur.
(1-9)
* This function is not effective for print jobs. (See “Printer Settings,”
on p. 12‑20.)
Enables you to enter values in inches on the numeric entry
screens.
– On
– Off
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS
Sets which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper
Selection and Automatic Drawer Switching. This setting can
be made independently for all the different functions of
the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use
different paper sources for different purposes.
– Copy (ON/OFF)
– Printer (ON/OFF)
– Receive (ON/OFF)
– Other (ON/OFF)
Register Paper Type
Enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper
source.
– Paper Drawer 1 (Plain, Recycled, Color, 3-hole punch,
Bond, Heavy Paper 1)
– Paper Drawer 2 (Plain, Recycled, Color, 3-hole punch,
Bond, Heavy Paper 1)
Energy Consumption in Sleep
Mode
Sets the amount of energy that the machine consumes when
it is in the Sleep mode.
– Low
– High
12‑7
Machine Settings
Inch Entry
Common Settings
Stack Bypass Standard Settings
Sets the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses
beforehand. This setting is useful if you always load the same
paper size and type into the stack bypass.
If the Stack Bypass Standard Settings are stored when using
the Send function, you can also use the stack bypass to
receive I-fax or fax documents.
– On
– Off
Machine Settings
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight
paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type,
especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper
is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the
image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a
service repair, or the paper could jam.
– If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for Copy
and Receive (I-fax or fax), you must select the stack bypass
when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See
“Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic Drawer Switching,” on
p. 2‑25.)
Paper Feed Method Switch
Sets whether the printer speed is the priority for your job,
or whether to print on a specific side of the paper. This is
useful when you want to make one- or two-sided prints on
preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already
printed on it) without changing the orientation of the paper
of the paper loaded in a paper source.
– Stack Bypass (Speed, Print Side)
– Paper Drawer 1 (Speed, Print Side)
– Paper Drawer 2 (Speed, Print Side)
Language Switch
Selects the language on the touch panel display. (See
“Specifications,” on p. 13‑2.)
Reserved Display (B/W)
Sets whether to reverse the contrast on the touch panel
display for better viewing. If you find it hard to read what is
being shown on the touch panel display, try using this mode.
– On
– Off
Error Display for Dirty Feeder
Sets whether to display the error message when the feeder
is dirty.
– On
– Off
12‑8
Common Settings
Data Compress. Ratio for Remote
Scans
Sets the compression ratio for network scanning. A high
compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used
for scanning the document, but results in a lower image
quality. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases
the amount of memory used for scanning the document, but
results in a higher image quality.
– High Ratio
– Normal
– Low Ratio
Gamma Value for Remote Scans
Sets the gamma value that is used for scanning color
documents into your computer through the Network Scan
function. Select a gamma value that is most suited to your
computer settings so that you can print the document from
your computer with the most optimal density.
– Gamma 1.0
– Gamma 1.4
– Gamma 1.8
– Gamma 2.2
Initialize Common Settings
Restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults (initial
settings) except for Language Switch.
– Yes
– No
Machine Settings
12‑9
Copy Settings
Setting Item
Image Orientation Priority
Description
Sets whether to activate the image direction priority.
Off
Copy orientation is rotated at 180 degrees.
On
Copy orientation is same as the document.
Auto Orientation
Sets the original size and copy ratio automatically.
– On
– Off
Standard Settings
Sets the default setting for copying.
Store
Sets your own <Standard Settings> as default.
Initialize
Restores all <Standard Settings> to the default.
Machine Settings
Initialize Copy Settings
12‑10
Restores all <Copy Settings> to the default.
– Yes
– No
Timer Setting
Setting Item
Description
Date & Time Settings
Sets the following:
– Current date and time
– Time zone of your machine’s location
– Daylight saving time mode
(See “Set Up the Machine,” in the Starter Guide.)
Auto Sleep Time
Sets the auto sleep mode when the machine remains idle for
a certain period of time (3min-30min). (See “Setting the Sleep
Mode,” on p. 1‑22.)
– On
– Off
Auto Clear Time
Sets the auto clear mode when the machine has no
operation idle for a certain period of time (0min-9min). The
machine returns to the Basic Features screen. (See “Setting
Auto Clear Time,” on p. 1‑23.)
Machine Settings
12‑11
Communications Settings
Setting Item
Common Settings
Machine Settings
TX Settings
Description
Sets the features common to the fax and send functions.
Sets the transmission features.
Unit Name
Registers your name/company name (max. 24 characters,
including spaces). (See “Set the Machine for Sending
Documents,” in the Starter Guide.)
Data Compression Ratio*1
Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high
compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used
for the document, but results in low quality images. On the
contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of
memory used for the document, but results in high quality
images.
– High Ratio
– Normal
– Low Ratio
Retry Times*1
Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an
e-mail, I-fax, or file server address. (0-5) (See Chapter 4,
“Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
Edit Standard Send Settings
Sets the default settings for sending documents. You can
set the Color mode*1, Document Size, File Format*1, Stamp,
Resolution, Density, and Original Type. (See Chapter 4,
“Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
TX Terminal ID
Sets the options for sender information.
Printing Position
Selects where the sender information is printed in small type
at the top of each page.
– Outside
– Inside
Telephone # Mark
Prefixes your number with the abbreviations FAX or TEL in
your sender information.
– FAX
– TEL
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
12‑12
Communications Settings
Gamma Value for Color
Send Jobs*1
Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value
corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient’s machine,
the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient’s
machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to
the quality of the original. (Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2, Gamma
1.0, Gamma 1.4)
Sharpness
Sets the contrast of the images you scan. (1-7)
Register Favorites Button
Stores destinations with it send settings in favorites buttons.
Color TX Scan Settings*1
Sets the priority for color scanned data. Selecting Speed
Priority reduces the time spent in sending the document, but
results in low quality images. Conversely, selecting Image
Priority increases the time spent in sending the document,
but results in high quality images.
– Speed Priority
– Image Priority
Default Screen for Send
Sets whether the [Favorites], [One-touch] tab, or the Send
Basic Features screen is displayed when the power is turned
on, (Reset) is pressed, or the Auto Clear mode is activated.
– Favorites Buttons
– One-touch Buttons
– Initial Function
Initialize TX Settings
Restores the TX Settings to their default settings. However,
Retry Times, Unit Name, and TX Terminal ID settings are not
initialized.
RX Settings
Sets the reception features.
Sets whether the machine prints received documents
on both sides of the paper. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and
Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
– Off
– On
Select Cassette
Sets how the machine prints documents when there is no
paper matching the size of the received document. (See
Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
12‑13
Machine Settings
2-Sided Print
Communications Settings
Switch A
The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the
same combined size as the received document.
– On
– Off
Switch B
The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the
same width as the received document.
– On
– Off
Switch C
The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in
width from the received document.
– On
– Off
Switch D
The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the
received document.
– On
– Off
Receive Reduction
On
Machine Settings
Off
12‑14
Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size.
(See Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference
Guide.)
Image reduction is turned on.
RX Reduction
Selects the reducing type.
– Auto
– Fix. Red. (75%, 90%, 95%, or 97%)
Reduce Direction
Selects the reducing direction.
– Ver. Hor.
– Vertical Only
Image reduction is turned off.
Communications Settings
Received Page Footer
Sets whether to insert the machine’s fax number and the
sender information on received faxes.
– Off
– On
Continue Printing When
Toner Is Out
Sets whether the machine continues printing received
documents and reports when it is running out of toner. If you
set the machine not to continue printing, the machine stops
printing when the toner starts to run out, and automatically
stores the received documents in memory.
– Off
– On
Fax Settings
User Settings
Sets the fax features.
Specifies the basic operation settings in the fax mode.
Unit Telephone #
Registers your fax number (max. 20 characters, including
spaces). (See “Set the Machine for Sending Documents,” in
the Starter Guide.)
Tel Line Type
Selects the telephone line type. (See “Set the Machine for
Sending Documents,” in the Starter Guide.)
– Pulse
– Tone
Monitor Volume Control
Sets the volume for the monitor tone that this machine
sounds during a fax transmission.
TX Settings
Sets the transmission features.
Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission
is activated.
– On
– Off
Pause Time
Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing
sequence. (1sec−15sec)
12‑15
Machine Settings
ECM TX
Communications Settings
Auto Redial
Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is
busy or a transmission error occurs. (See Chapter 4, “Sending
and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
Redial Times
Sets the number of retries. (1 times−10 times)
Redial Interval
Sets period of time before redialing. (2 min.−99 min.)
Transmission Error Redial Sets whether the machine redials automatically when
transmission error occurs.
– On
– Off
Check Dial Tone Before
Sending
Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.
– Off
– On
Rotate Send
Sets whether to use the TX Rotation function. TX Rotation
function automatically corrects the orientation of the
document by rotating the image when sending. For example,
if you set a document that has a horizontal orientation
vertically on the machine, the machine rotates the image and
sends it horizontally.
You can use the TX Rotation mode for an LTR document only.
The TX Rotation mode is not available if you are using the
Direct Sending or Manual Sending.
– On
– Off
RX Settings
Machine Settings
ECM RX
12‑16
Sets the reception features.
Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is
activated.
– On
– Off
Adjustment/Cleaning
Setting Item
Description
Transfer Roller Cleaning
Cleans the transfer roller. (See “Transfer Roller,” on p. 10‑11.)
Fixing Unit Cleaning
Cleans the fixing unit. (See “Fixing Unit,” on p. 10‑3.)
Feeder Cleaning
Cleans the rollers of the feeder. (See “Automatic Feeder
Cleaning,” on p. 10‑9.)
Special Mode M
Sets to improve print quality or fix irregular print density. If
print quality decreases or an irregularity in the print density
appears, transcription output may not function adequately.
Standard
Normal transcription output.
Low
Lower than normal transcription output.
Selecting [Low] may be effective when printing on paper that
contains a lot of moisture because it was stored for a long period of
time after opening, or when printing on recycled paper.
Moderate
Slightly higher than normal transcription output.
High
Higher than normal transcription output.
Selecting [High] may be effective when printing on the
heavyweight paper.
Special Mode N
Sets whether to prevent paper curls or jams which may occur
when printing on paper that has absorbed moisture.
Auto
Automatically switches to the appropriate curl prevention
level.
Manual
Enables manual selection of [Medium] or [High].
Off
Medium
Prevents curling of paper that has absorbed moisture.
High
Prevents paper curls more efficiently than when [Medium] is
selected.
Disables Special Mode N.
12‑17
Machine Settings
– Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or
humidity for an extended period of time. Printing on such paper
will frequently result in a paper jam.
– Printing times with Special Mode N activated are longer than
when the function is not used.
– If you select [Medium] or [High] when paper is not moistened, the
print quality may be deteriorated.
Adjustment/Cleaning
Special Mode O
Sets whether to prevent paper jams when printing on the
back of a printed paper.
– Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or
humidity for an extended period of time. Printing on such paper
will frequently result in a paper jam.
– When you select [Medium] or [High], the image may become
faint.
Medium
Paper separates easily from the cartridge, preventing paper
jams.
High
Prevents paper jams more effectively than when [Medium] is
selected.
Off
Disables Special Mode O.
Special Mode P
Sets whether to prevent paper curls when using paper such
as lightweight paper or recycled paper, which curls easily
regardless of humidity.
Machine Settings
If both of the Special Mode N and Special Mode P settings are
enabled, Special Mode N will prevail.
Off
Disables Special Mode P.
Medium
Prevents paper from curling.
High
Prevents paper curls more effectively than when [Medium] is
selected.
Bond Special Fixing Mode
Selects to perform special fixing for bond paper.
– On
– Off
Special Mode S
Sets whether to reduce the waiting time for a next job. If
size of paper required is different for a job that follows an
extended amount of printing, there may be a waiting time
before the next job starts.
* If you set this mode to [Speed Priority 1] or [Speed Priority 2],
a previously printed image may reappear faintly on the next
printout.
Off
Does not reduce the waiting time.
Speed Priority 1
Reduces the waiting time. Printing resumes quickly.
Speed Priority 2
Reduces the waiting time to a lesser degree.
12‑18
Adjustment/Cleaning
Rotate Collate Adjustment
Adjusts the wait time when printing with the Rotate Collate
mode. Printing with this mode involves two different paper
sources, and a certain wait time is required to switch them.
Speed Priority 2
Medium wait time.
Image Priority
Longest wait time.
Speed Priority 1
Shortest wait time.
Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder
Sets whether to prevent dirt and grime in the feeder from
appearing on your prints and copies. If the feeder is dirty,
dots or lines may appear on prints or copies.
– Off
– On
– If either [JPEG] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected for [File Format]
when the Send function is used, the setting for this mode is not
applied.
– While some dots or lines may continue to be printed even if this
mode is set to [On], copies are significantly clearer than when this
mode is set to [Off].
Maintenance Code
This setting is not functional in this model.
Machine Settings
12‑19
Printer Settings
Setting Item
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE
Description
Sets the default paper size when no paper source is specified.
(LTR, EXECUTIV, STMT, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, MONARCH,
DL, A4, A3, B4, B5, A5, 11 x 17, LGL)
If you are printing from an OS (operating system) that does not
have a printer driver for the machine, make sure that the paper
loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper size specified in this
setting. If the paper size specified in this setting is not available, an
error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job
and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been
selected through the application, the machine automatically selects
the default print settings for the paper size and type.
Machine Settings
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE
Sets the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has
internally defined optimal print modes for each specified
paper type.
(PLAIN PAPER, COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY
PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, 3-HOLE PUNCH PAPER,
TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE)
If you are printing from an OS (operating system) that does not
have a printer driver for the machine, make sure that the paper
loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper type specified in this
setting. If the paper type specified in this setting is not available, an
error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job,
and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been
selected through the application, the machine automatically selects
the default print settings for the paper type and size. (See “Setting
Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2‑19.)
3. COPIES
Sets the number of documents printed. (1-999)
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING
Sets whether to activate two-sided printing.
– OFF
– ON
5. PRINT QUALITY
Sets the image quality, density or toner saving mode for
printing.
12‑20
Printer Settings
1. IMAGE REFINEMENT
Sets whether to print smoothly the jagged outlines of
characters and graphics.
– ON
– OFF
The results of image refinement may be different depending on the
types of characters and graphics you want to print.
2. DENSITY
Adjusts the print density. (1-9)
3. TONER SAVER
Sets whether the toner saving mode is enabled.
– OFF
– ON
If [ON] is selected for Toner Saver, very light or finely detailed
images may not be printed clearly.
6. PAGE LAYOUT
1. BINDING
Sets the printing layout.
Sets the binding position for two-sided printing.
– LONG EDGE
– SHORT EDGE
– You cannot create a binding margin with this setting alone. Use
this setting in combination with the Margin setting to create a
binding margin.
– For two-sided printing, the orientation of the image on the back
side of the page may be changed by this setting.
2. MARGIN
– If this setting moves the image outside the printable area, part of
the image may be cut off.
– Pressing [▶] increases the setting value by 0.01" (0.5 mm) each
time the key is pressed. Pressing [◀] decreases the value by 0.01"
(0.5 mm) each time. Holding down either [◀] or [▶] continuously
speeds up the value alteration.
12‑21
Machine Settings
Sets the page margin in inches or millimeters.
– INCHES (-01.90INCHES–01.90INCHES)
– mm (-50.0 mm–50.0 mm)
Printer Settings
7. AUTO ERROR SKIP
Sets whether to clear an error and continue printing
automatically when an error occurs (Error skip).
– Error skip only temporarily clears an error, so the data may not
print correctly.
– This setting is valid even if multiple errors have occurred.
OFF
The auto continue is off. You must perform error skips from
the touch panel display.
ON
Error skips are performed automatically.
8. ERROR TIME OUT
Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error
when no data is received from the computer.
Machine Settings
If this function is set so that a job will timeout, the machine may end
a print job before all the data has been received if it takes a long
time for the PC to send the data. If this occurs, adjust the length of
the Error Time Out setting.
ON
Sets the error time out period. (5SEC–300SEC)
OFF
The error time out is off.
9. COLLATE
Sets whether to collate the printouts automatically.
– OFF
– COLLATE
10. INIT. PRINTER SET
Restores all <PRINTER SETTINGS> to the default.
– OFF
– ON
Do not turn off the machine while the settings are being initialized
as this may damage the machine’s memory.
11. PCL SETTINGS*1
Sets the PCL printer setting.
1. PAPER SAVE
Sets whether to save blank pages.
– OFF
– ON
2. ORIENTATION
Sets the paper orientation.
– PORTRAIT
– LANDSCAPE
3. FONT NUMBER
Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using
the corresponding font numbers. (0-91)
(See chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the Reference Guide.)
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
12‑22
Printer Settings
4. POINT SIZE
Specifies a point size for the default font. This item
appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of
a proportionally spaced scalable font. (4.00 point–999.75
point)
5. PITCH
Specifies the pitch for the default font. This item appears
when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a fixed pitch
scalable font. (00.44 cpi–99.99 cpi)
6. FORM LINES
Sets the number of lines to be printed on a page. (5 lines-128
lines)
7. SYMBOL SET
Selects the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host
computer.
(PC8, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004, PSTEXT,
ROMAN8, ROMAN9, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,
DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60,
ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, LEGAL, MCTEXT,
PC775)
8. CUSTOM PAPER
Sets whether to use a custom paper size.
OFF
Disables you to specify a custom paper size.
ON
Enables you to specify a custom paper size.
Selects the unit of measurement to specify a custom paper
size.
– INCHES
– MILLIMETERS
2. X DIMENSION
Specifies the horizontal size of the custom paper.
(5.83"-17.00" (148 mm-432 mm))
3. Y DIMENSION
Specifies the vertical size of the custom paper.
(3.75"-11.69" (95 mm-297 mm))
9. APPEND CR TO LF
Sets whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed
code (LF) is received.
NO
The print head moves down to the next line when line feed
code is received, and the margin does not change (such as
the beginning of the next line).
YES
The print head moves to the beginning of the next line when
line feed code is received.
12‑23
Machine Settings
1. UNIT OF MEASURE
Printer Settings
10. ENLARGE A4
Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to
that of Letter size in width.
– This setting is applicable for the PCL5 printing only. The PCL6
printing is not supported.
– This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.
– This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.
OFF
All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom,
left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.
ON
All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top and
bottom edges and 1/8" (3.30 mm) from the left and right
edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width
increases.
11. HALFTONES
Machine Settings
1. TEXT
12‑24
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium
gradation) for black-and-white data for each text part,
graphics part and image part.
Enables this function to text parts.
RESOLUTION
Prints precisely so that the lines of text data appear clearly.
This setting is appropriate for printing data that contains text
or thin lines.
TONE
Prints with a stable texture and distinct gradation, by
enhancing the contrast of tone. This setting is appropriate for
printing image data such as photographic images.
GRADATION
Prints with a smooth gradation and fine outline quality
combined. This setting is appropriate for printing diagrams
or graphs in which gradation is used.
2. GRAPHICS
Enables this function to graphics parts such as diagrams and
graphs.
– TONE
– GRADATION
– RESOLUTION
3. IMAGE
Enables this function to image parts such as picture images.
– TONE
– GRADATION
– RESOLUTION
Printer Settings
12. RESET PRINTER
Clears all print jobs in progress and resets the printer
function.
– OFF
– ON
– If the machine is being used on a network, please note that
resetting the printer may affect data being received from other
users.
– If you reset the printer, data may be deleted for print jobs that
have already been received, or received while the printer is being
reset. However, in some cases, the data is not deleted from the
machine’s memory, and the print job may not print correctly.
Canon recommends that you reset the printer to delete the data
and print the job again.
Machine Settings
12‑25
Address Book Settings
Setting Item
Description
Registers the destinations in the Address Book. Up to 300
destinations can be registered. (See “Storing/Editing Address
Book,” on p. 4‑58.)
One-touch Buttons
Registers the destinations on one-touch buttons. Up to 200
destinations can be registered. (See “Storing/Editing OneTouch Buttons,” on p. 4‑71.)
Machine Settings
Register Address
12‑26
Report Settings
Setting Item
Settings
Description
Sets the report functions. (See Chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the
Reference Guide.)
TX Report
For Error Only
Report With TX Image
On
Sets whether the transmission report prints out.
Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.
Sets whether to print the first page of the document under
the report. (When you are sending a PC-Fax or a color
document, the first page of the document is not printed even
if you set [Report With TX Image] to [On].)
– Off
– On
Prints a report every time you send a document.
Report With TX Image
Off
Activity Report
Sets whether to print the first page of the document under
the report. (When you are sending a PC-Fax or a color
document, the first page of the document is not printed even
if you set [Report With TX Image] to [On].)
– Off
– On
No report is printed.
Sets whether to automatically print the transaction report
and selects its type.
Sets whether an activity report is printed automatically every
40 transactions.
– On
– Off
Send/Receive Separate
Sets whether an activity report is printed separately for
sending and receiving or not.
– Off
– On
Machine Settings
Auto Print
12‑27
Report Settings
RX Report
No report is printed.
For Error Only
Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.
On
Prints a report every time you receive a document.
Print List
Address Book List
Machine Settings
Prints lists.
Prints the destinations registered in the Address Book (onetouch buttons and Address Book).
One-touch Buttons
Prints the destinations registered in one-touch buttons.
Address Book
Prints the destinations registered in the Address Book.
User’s Data List
12‑28
Sets whether the reception report prints out.
Off
Prints the setting list registered in the menu. (See “Printing
USER’S DATA LIST,” on p. 12‑2.)
System Settings
Setting Item
System Manager Settings
Description
Sets the system manager information to protect the contents
of System Settings. Once the system manager ID and system
password is set, they must be entered every time you access
the System Settings menu.
System Manager
Sets the system manager name (max. 32 characters,
including spaces).
System Manager ID
Sets the system manager ID (seven digits).
System Password
Sets the system manager password (seven digits).
Device Info Settings
Sets device information.
Device Name
Registers the machine name (max. 32 characters, including
spaces).
Location
Registers the machine location (max. 32 characters, including
spaces).
Department ID Management
Sets if the department ID management is used.
Off
Does not use the department ID management.
On
Uses the department ID management.
Register ID/Password
Sets up or modifies Department ID information.
Register
Turn Limits On/Off and
Set Page Limits
Edit
Turn Limits On/Off and
Set Page Limits
Erase
Sets page limits for scan, prints, and copies from 0 to 999,999
pages.
Changes registered passwords and page limits.
Changes page limits for scan, prints, and copies from 0 to
999,999 pages.
Erases registered Department IDs and passwords.
Displays, clears, and prints counter information.
Clear
Clears the counter information for selected departments.
Clear All Totals
Clears the counter information for all departments.
Print List
Prints a list of counter information.
12‑29
Machine Settings
Page Totals
Registers new Department IDs and passwords.
System Settings
Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs
Sets if print jobs from computers with unknown IDs are
accepted or rejected.
– On
– Off
Allow ID Unknown Remote
Scan Jobs
Sets if network scan jobs from computers with unknown IDs
are accepted or rejected.
– Off
– On
User ID Management*1
Sets if the user ID management is used.
– Off
– On
Network Settings*1
Sets the network setting. (See Chapter 6, “Network
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference
Guide or “Set the Machine for Network Usage (imageCLASS
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Starter Guide.)
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Machine Settings
IP Address Settings
Sets TCP/IP network.
Sets TCP/IPv4 network.
Sets IPv4 Address settings.
IP Address
Registers a fixed IPv4 address to the machine.
Subnet Mask
Registers a fixed subnet mask to the machine.
Gateway Address
Registers a fixed gateway address to the machine.
DHCP
Sets whether to automatically obtain an IPv4 address for the
machine using a DHCP server.
RARP
Sets whether to automatically obtain an IPv4 address for the
machine using a RARP server.
BOOTP
Sets whether to automatically obtain an IPv4 address for the
machine using a BOOTP server.
PING Command
Checks the TCP/IPv4 network connection.
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
12‑30
System Settings
IP Address Range
Settings
Off
Sets whether to use the IP address filter function.
Disables the IP address filter.
On
Enables the IP address filter.
Permit/Reject
Selects whether to permit or reject access from a specified
IPv4 address or IPv4 address range.
Register
Specifies the IPv4 address or IPv4 address range to be
restricted.
Single Address Specifies a single IPv4 address to be restricted.
Multiple
Addresses
Specifies a range of IPv4 addresses to be restricted.
Edit
Edits the IP address or IPv4 address range to be restricted.
Erase
Erases the IP address or IPv4 address range to be restricted.
DNS Server
DNS Server Address
Settings
Sets the DNS server settings.
Registers the DNS server address.
Primary DNS
Server
Registers the primary server address.
Secondary DNS
Server
Registers the secondary server address.
DNS Host Name/
Domain Name
Settings
Registers the host name and domain name of the DNS server.
Host Name
Registers the host name of the DNS server.
Domain Name
Registers the domain name of the DNS server.
12‑31
Machine Settings
DNS Dynamic Update Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update function.
– Off
Settings
– On
System Settings
Machine Settings
IPv6 Settings
12‑32
Sets IPv6 Address settings.
Use IPv6
Sets the use of IPv6 address.
– Off
– On
Stateless Address
Settings
Sets the machine to obtain the IPv6 address automatically
using the machine’s MAC address and the prefix (information
indicating the network belonged to) included in the RA
(Router Advertisement) notified by the router when the
machine is started.
– Off
– On
Manual Address Settings
Sets whether to set a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.
Off
A fixed IPv6 address is not set.
On
Sets a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.
Manual Address
Registers a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.
Prefix Length
Sets the prefix length of the IPv6 address. (0-128)
Default Router
Addr.
Sets the default router address.
Use DHCPv6
Sets whether to use DHCPv6.
– Off
– On
PING Command
Checks the TCP/IPv6 network connection.
IPv6 Address
Checks the network connection by specifying the IPv6
address.
Host Name
Checks the network connection by specifying the host name.
System Settings
IP Address Range
Settings
Off
Sets whether to use the IP address filter function.
Disables the IP address filter.
On
Enables the IP address filter.
Permit/Reject
Selects whether to permit or reject access from a specified
IPv6 address or IPv6 address range.
Reg.
Specifies the IPv6 address or IPv6 address range to be
restricted.
Single Address Specifies a single IPv6 address to be restricted.
Multiple
Addresses
Specifies a range of IPv6 addresses to be restricted.
Prefix Address
Specifies a prefix address on IPv6 addresses to be restricted.
Edit
Edits the IPv6 address or IPv6 address range to be restricted.
Erase
Erases the IPv6 address or IPv6 address range to be restricted.
DNS Server
DNS Server Address
Settings
Sets the DNS server settings.
Registers the DNS server address.
Primary DNS
Server
Registers the primary server address.
Secondary DNS
Server
Registers the secondary server address.
DNS Host Name/
Domain Name
Settings
Registers the host name and domain name of the DNS server.
Sets whether to use the same host name and domain name
as IPv4.
– Off
– On
Host Name
Registers the host name of the DNS server.
Domain Name
Registers the domain name of the DNS server.
DNS Dynamic Update Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update function.
– Off
Settings
– On
12‑33
Machine Settings
Use Same Host
Name/Domain
Name as IPv4
System Settings
WINS Configuration
Sets the machine not to resolve a name with WINS.
On
Sets the machine to resolve a name with WINS.
WINS Server
Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.
– On
– Off
RAW Settings
Sets whether to use RAW as the print application.
Enables the use of RAW.
Use Bidirectional
Off
Machine Settings
Registers the IP address of a WINS server.
LPD Settings
On
12‑34
Sets the WINS settings to resolve a name with WINS.
Off
Sets whether to use bidirectional communication.
– On
– Off
Disables the use of RAW.
Use PASV Mode for FTP
Sets whether to use the PASV mode for FTP.
– Off
– On
FTP Extension
Sets whether to use the FTP extension.
– Off
– On
Use HTTP
Sets whether to activate HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
for the Remote UI.
– On
– Off
Port Number Settings
Sets the port number settings.
LPD
0-65535 (default: 515)
RAW
0-65535 (default: 9100)
HTTP
0-65535 (default: 80)
SMTP Receive
0-65535 (default: 25)
POP3 Receive
0-65535 (default: 110)
FTP Sending
0-65535 (default: 21)
SMTP Sending
0-65535 (default: 25)
SNMP
0-65535 (default: 161)
System Settings
Receiving MAC Address
Settings
Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter.
Off
Disables MAC address filter.
On
Specifies a MAC address filter to access. MAC address must
be entered for each setting.
Register
Registers MAC addresses. Up to five MAC addresses can be
registered.
Edit
Edits MAC addresses.
Erase
Erases MAC addresses.
Proxy Settings
Sets the proxy settings.
Use Proxy
Sets the use of a proxy server.
Off
Proxy server is not used.
On
Proxy server is used.
Server Address
Sets a proxy server IP address or FQDN.
Port Number
Sets the port number of a proxy server.
Use Proxy within
the Same Domain
Sets whether to use a proxy in the same domain.
Authentication
Settings
Sets proxy authentication.
Off
Disables proxy authentication.
On
Enables proxy authentication.
User
Sets the user name to use for proxy authentication.
Password
Sets the password to use for proxy authentication.
Machine Settings
12‑35
System Settings
SMB Settings
Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS
network.
Use SMB Client
Sets whether to use SMB Client.
Off
SMB client is not used.
On
SMB client is used.
Server
Enters the NetBIOS name of the machine.
Workgroup
Enters the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to.
Comment
Enters a comment about the printer.
LM Announce
Sets if the machine notifies the LAN Manager of its existence.
– Off
– On
SNMP Settings
Use SNMP
On
Machine Settings
Off
12‑36
Sets detailed information about SNMP.
Sets whether to activate SNMP.
Activates SNMP.
Community Name
Sets SNMP community name (default: public).
Writable SNMP
Enables computers on the network to access the machine
and modify its settings.
– On
– Off
Get Printer
Management
Information from
Host
Sets whether to get printer management information from
host.
Deactivates SNMP.
System Settings
Enable Dedicated Port
Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a
Canon printer driver or utility.
– On
– Off
Ethernet Driver Settings
Specifies the type of network connection.
Auto Detect
Selects the detection method of Ethernet driver.
On
Sets the machine to determine the communication mode
(Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10BaseT/100Base-TX) automatically.
Off
Sets the communication mode and Ethernet type manually.
Communication
Mode
Selects the communication mode.
– Half Duplex
– Full Duplex
Ethernet Type
Selects the Ethernet type.
– 10 Base-T
– 100 Base-TX
E-mail/I-Fax*1
Sets detailed settings for e-mail/I-fax.
SMTP Receive
Sets whether to receive e-mail/l-faxes using the machine’s
own SMTP receiving function.
– Off
– On
POP
Sets whether to receive e-mail/l-faxes using a POP server.
– Off
– On
Authentication/Encryption
Specifies authenticating method before sending e-mail.
Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires POP before
SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in
the POP server before sending e-mail).
– Off
– On
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
12‑37
Machine Settings
POP Authentication
before Send
System Settings
SMTP Authentication
(SMTP AUTH)
Off
Disables SMTP Authentication.
On
Enables SMTP Authentication.
– User
– Password
SMTP Server
Registers the SMTP server name.
E-mail Address
Enters the e-mail address your machine will use (max. 64
characters).
POP Server
Enters the POP server IP address or name (max. 48
characters).
POP Address
Enters the login name for access to the POP server (max. 32
characters).
POP Password
Enters the password for access to the POP server (max. 32
characters).
POP Interval
Sets the interval you want the POP server to check for
incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is
not checked automatically. (1-99)
Startup Time Settings
Communications Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Settings*1
Machine Settings
Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires SMTP
Authentication (method for authenticating users who have
logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network
communications for the machine (0-300sec).
Sets the fax and e-mail/I-fax communication.
Sets the e-mail/I-fax communications.
Maximum TX Data Size
Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages
and I-fax documents. If the e-mail message send job exceeds
this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages
before being sent. However, if an I-fax transmission exceeds
the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent.
(0MB-99MB)
Divided TX over Max.Data
Size
Sets whether to divide a document into separate files when it
is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify.
– Off
– On
Default Subject
The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject
whenever you do not enter a subject when sending a job.
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
12‑38
System Settings
Fax Settings
Sets the facsimile communication.
Send Start Speed
Sets the transmission start speed for faxes. (33600bps,
14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps)
Receive Start Speed
Sets the reception start speed for faxes. (33600bps,
14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps)
Memory Lock Settings
Sets whether to receive and store all documents in memory
and not to print automatically. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and
Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)
– Off
– On
Memory Lock Password
Registers the password that protects the authority for
accessing Memory Lock settings.
Report Print
Sets whether to print a report on memory lock reception.
– Off
– On
Memory Lock Time Settings
Sets whether to set a period for memory lock reception.
Off
Disables setting a period of memory lock reception.
On
Enables setting a period of memory lock reception.
– Memory Lock Start Time
– Memory Lock End Time
Forwarding Settings
Sets the machine to forward received I-fax documents to
other machines or the file servers. If a received document
matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the
specified destination.
Validate/Invalidate
Turns on or off the forwarding mode.
Register
Registers forwarding conditions.
Sets a name for the forwarding condition. You can enter up
to 50 characters for the condition name.
Forwarding Conditions
Sets the forwarding condition.
12‑39
Machine Settings
Condition Name
System Settings
Sets the forwarding condition for received fax documents.
– [disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as a
forwarding condition.
– [does not exist]: Forwards the document if the Fax
Number information does not exist.
– [equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number
information matches all of the characters entered.
– [differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number
information differs from the characters entered.
– [begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number
information begins with the characters entered.
– [ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number
information ends with the characters entered.
– [contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number
information contains the characters entered.
– [does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax
Number information does not contain the characters
entered.
I-Fax*1
Sets the forwarding condition for received I-fax documents.
– [disregarded]: Disregards the Destination, From, or Subject
information as forwarding conditions.
– [equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject
information matches all of the characters entered.
– [differs from]: Forwards the document if the Destination,
From, or Subject information differs from the characters
entered.
– [begins with]: Forwards the document if the Destination,
From, or Subject information begins with the characters
entered.
– [ends with]: Forwards the document if the Destination,
From, or Subject information ends with the characters
entered.
– [contains]: Forwards the document if the Destination,
From, or Subject information contains the characters
entered.
– [does not contain]: Forwards the document if the
Destination, From, or Subject information does not
contain the characters entered.
Machine Settings
Fax
Forwarding Destination
Sets the destination address to forward the document.
File Format*1
Sets the file format of the document you want to forward.
– TIFF
– PDF
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
12‑40
System Settings
Forward w/o Cond.
Sets whether to store the forwarding destinations of a
received document if the forwarding settings of the received
document are not registered, or if the received document
does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you
have specified.
Forwarding Destination
Sets the destination address to forward the document.
File Format*1
Sets the file format of the document you want to forward.
– TIFF
– PDF
Detail/Edit
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been
stored.
Erase
Erases the selected forwarding condition.
Print List
Remote UI
On/Off*2
Restrict the Send Function
Prints the forwarding conditions list.
Sets whether to activate the Remote UI function to operate
the machine and change the settings from a network
computer using a web browser.
– On
– Of
Sets restrictions on the Send function.
Sets a password to restrict editing the Address Book. (7 digits
maximum)
– Off
– On
Restrict New Addresses
Sets whether to restrict registering or changing destinations
in the Address Book. Sets whether to restrict making calls to
the destinations not registered in Address Book.
– Off
– On
Allow Fax Driver TX
Sets whether to restrict sending faxes from a computer using
the fax driver.
– On
– Off
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers
Sets whether to confirm the entered fax numbers each time
you send a fax.
– Off
– On
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.
*2 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
12‑41
Machine Settings
Address Book Password
Machine Settings
System Settings
Restrict Recall
Sets whether to disable the redial function of the [Recall] key.
– Off
– On
Restrict Sequential Broadcast
Sets whether to disable the broadcasting function.
Confirmation Broadcast
Sets whether to confirm to enable the broadcasting function
each time you send.
Prohibit Broadcast
Disables the broadcasting function.
Off
The restrict broadcast setting is not set.
Job Log Display
Sets whether to display job logs.
– On
– Off
Use USB Device
Sets whether to restrict jobs through the USB interface.
– On
– Off
Display Dept. ID/User Name
Sets whether to display the Department ID or user name
which is currently being used to log on to the machine in the
Job/Print Status Display Area.
– On
– Off
Failed Forwarding Document Set.
Sets the machine to print and/or store received documents
when document forwarding fails.
Print Image
Sets whether to print out the image if forwarding fails.
– On
– Off
Store Image to Memory
Sets whether to store the image in memory if forwarding
fails.
– Off
– On
Auto Online/Offline*1
Switches the machine online and offline to use the network
scan function.
Auto Online
Sets whether to switch the machine online.
– Off
– On
Auto Offline
Sets whether to switch the machine offline.
– Off
– On
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
12‑42
System Settings
Update Firmware
This function is used only when the printer firmware needs to
be updated.
PDL Selection (PnP)
Detects and installs drivers that support functions specified
on the machine into your computer.
– UFRII LT
– PCL5e*1
– PCL6*1
– FAX
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
Machine Settings
12‑43
12‑44
Machine Settings
13
Appendix
Specifications∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 13‑2
Index∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙∙ 13‑9
Appendix
Specifications
General
● Type
● Power Source
● Maximum Power
Consumption
● Warm-up Time
● Weight
● Dimensions (W x D x H)
● Installation Space
(W x D)
● Platen Type
● Photoconductive
Material
● Copying System
● Density Control
● Developing System
Appendix
● Fixing System
● Capacity Per Tray
● Maximum Original Size
● Output Orientation
13‑2
Desktop
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
Approximately 1.425 kW
26 seconds maximum after powering on
Activation time may vary, depending on the conditions
under which the machine is being used. (In all cases, at a
room temperature of 68°F (20°C).)
Approximately 123 lb (56 kg)
24 1/2" x 26 5/8" x 29 3/4" (622 mm × 676 mm × 757 mm)
36 1/4" x 26 5/8" (920 mm × 676 mm)
(when the stack bypass is extended)
Stationary
OPC (Organic Photo Conductor)
Indirect Electrostatic Copying
Automatic or manual (9 levels)
Single component dry toner projection development
system
On-demand fusing
250 sheets
11 3/4" x 17" (297 mm x 432 mm)
Face Down
General
● Paper Feeding System
● Display Languages
● Acceptable Originals
● Acceptable Paper Stock
● Printable Area
● Scanning Area
Paper Drawers:
250 sheets x 2 drawers (22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Stack Bypass:
80 sheets (LTR/LTRR/STMT/STMTR/EXEC,
22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
50 sheets (LGL/11" x 17", 22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
50 sheets (Transparencies/Heavyweight paper, 24 lb to
32 lb bond (91 to 128 g/m2))
10 envelopes
1 sheet (Labels)
ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPAÑOL/PORTUGUÊS
» p. 2‑2.
» p. 2‑11.
» p. 2‑14.
» p. 2‑4
Feeder
● Type
13‑3
Appendix
Automatic Document Feeder
● Originals
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
● Original Paper Weight
14 lb to 28 lb bond (52 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) (One-page
scanning for 10 lb to 14 lb bond (37 g/m2 to 52 g/m2) and
28 lb to 32 lb bond (105 g/m2 to 128 g/m2))
● Original Tray Capacity
LTR, LTRR: 50 sheets (22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
LGL, 11" x 17": 25 sheets (22 lb bond (80 g/m2))
● Original Scanning Speed 20 sheets/minute (LTR)
● Power Source
From main unit
● Power Consumption
Approximately 26 W max.
● Dimensions (W x D x H)
22 1/4" x 19 1/4" x 4 7/8" (565 mm x 489.4 mm x 122 mm)
● Weight
Approximately 15.4 lb (7.0 kg)
Duplex Unit
● Paper Sizes
● Paper Weight
● Power Source
● Power Consumption
● Dimensions (W × D × H)
● Weight
11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
17 lb to 24 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
From main unit
Approximately 21 W max.
17 1/4" × 17 5/8" × 14 7/8" (437.2 mm × 448 mm ×
378.3 mm)
Approximately 5 lb (2.5 kg)
Copier
● Copying System
● Scanning Resolution
● Printing Resolution
● Magnification
Indirect electrostatic copying
600 dpi x 600 dpi
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi
Direct 1:1 (±0.5%)
Reduction 1:0.78 (LGL → LTRR)
1:0.73 (11" x 17" → LGL)
1:0.64 (11" x 17" → LTRR)
1:0.50 (11" x 17" → STMTR)
● First Copy Time
Appendix
● Copy Speed
Enlargement 1:1.21 (LGL → 11" x 17")
1:1.29 (LTRR → 11" x 17")
1:2.00 (STMTR → 11" x 17")
6.9 seconds (LTR, direct, paper drawer 1)
Sheets per minute
Direct
imageCLASS imageCLASS imageCLASS
MF7480
MF7470
MF7460
11" x 17" 10
15
15
15
LGL 10
11
11
11
LTR 20
25
18
18
LTRR 11
11
11
11
STMT 16
10
10
10
● Multiple Copies
13‑4
1 to 99 sheets
Printer
● Paper Delivery
● Print Speed
● Printing Resolution
● Number of Tones
● Cartridge
Controller Specifications
● CPU
● Memory Capacity
● Host interface
Software Specifications
● Command Language
● Resident Fonts
● Printable Area
100 sheets (17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2))
See “Copy Speed,” on p. 13‑4.
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi
256
» p. 1‑20.
ARM9 196MHz
RAM:
Standard 256MB
ROM:
Standard 36MB (16+4MB+16MB)
One USB connector (V2.0)
PCL5e*1, PCL6*1, and UFRII LT
PCL*1:
80 Scalable fonts, 2 OCR fonts, and 10 Bitmap fonts
PCL5e*1, PCL6*1:
Reduced to 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left,
and right edges of the paper.
UFRII LT:
Reduced to 1/4" (5 mm) (for Envelope: 3/8" (10 mm))
from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.
*1 Only for users of the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.
Appendix
13‑5
Facsimile
● Telephone Line Used/
Number of Lines
● Transmission Type
● Compression Method
● Transmission Speed
● Transmission Times
● Image Memory
● Scan Line Density (Scan,
Transmission)
● Auto Dial Function
● Sending Original Sizes
● Receiving Paper Sizes
Public Switched Telephone Network, 1 line
Super G3, G3
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Super G3: 33.6 kbps, G3: 14.4 kbps
ECM-MMR: Approximately 3.2 seconds
G3MR method: Approximately 13 seconds
G3MH method: Approximately 13 seconds
JBIG: Approximately 2.6 seconds
Approximately 1,000 pages
Standard: 8 pels*1/mm × 3.85 line/mm
Fine: 8 pels*1/mm × 7.7 line/mm
Super Fine: 8 pels*1/mm × 15.4 line/mm
Ultra Fine: 16 pels*1/mm × 15.4 line/mm
Address Book (300 destinations)
One-touch buttons (200 destinations)
Favorites buttons (18 destinations)
Group addresses (499 destinations)
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR
Appendix
*1 Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).
13‑6
Send (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)
Send to file server
● Communication Protocol
● Data Format
● Resolution
● System Environment
● Interface
● Color Mode
● Original Type
● Others
E-mail and I-fax*1
● Communication Protocol
● Resolution
● Data Format
● Server Software
SMTP, POP3, I-Fax (Simple mode)
For Sending E-mail:
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi,
200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
For Sending I-Fax:
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
E-mail: TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color),
PDF (Compact) (Color)
I-Fax: TIFF (MH)
E-mail: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT,
STMTR
I-Fax: LGL*2, LTR, LTRR, STMT*2, STMTR*2
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP2),
Sendmail 8.11.2, Lotus Domino R4.5/R5
*1 Only the B&W mode is available for sending and receiving I-fax documents.
*2 Sent as LTR
13‑7
Appendix
● Original Size
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF
(Compact) (Color)
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi,
200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Windows 98/Me, Windows XP Professional/
Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/
Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Server
2003, Windows Vista, Solaris Version 2.6 or
later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color, B&W (black and white)
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Browse Windows (SMB) File Server
Ethernet Interface Adaptor (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)
Hardware Specifications
● Network Interface
Software Specifications
● Protocol Supported
Appendix
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
13‑8
10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ-45)
TCP/IP
Frame type: Ethernet II
Print applications: LPD/Raw
Index
Symbols & Numerics
Automatic paper selection 2‑25, 3‑4
1 to 2-Sided 3‑25, 3‑27
Auto zoom 3‑14, 3‑17
2 to 1-Sided 3‑26, 3‑29
Available paper sizes 5‑11
2 to 2-Sided 3‑25, 3‑28
3-hole punch paper 2‑11
B
Basic copying method 3‑2
A
Basic printing method 6‑2
Accessing the setting menu 12‑3
Basic sending method
E-mail 4‑4
Fax 4‑2
File server 4‑11
I-fax 4‑8
Before using the machine 1‑1
Activity report
Printing 4‑96, 5‑9
Additional Functions key 1‑6
Adjustment/Cleaning 12‑17
Auto clear time 1‑23
Bond paper 2‑11
Book to 2-Sided 3‑26, 3‑31
Brightness
Adjusting 1‑16
C
Canceling
Copy jobs 3‑35
Copy settings 3‑34
Print jobs 6‑5
RX jobs 5‑3
Scan jobs 7‑7
TX jobs 4‑90
Canceling copy jobs
Using the system monitor screen 3‑36
Using the touch panel display 3‑35
Canceling Print jobs
Using the system monitor screen 6‑5
Canceling scan jobs
Using the system monitor screen 7‑7
Appendix
Additional Functions menu
Accessing 12‑3
Address Book Settings 12‑26
Adjustment/Cleaning 12‑17
Common Settings 12‑6
Communications Settings 12‑12
Copy Settings 12‑10
Printer Settings 12‑20
Report Settings 12‑27
System Settings 12‑29
Timer Settings 12‑11
Address Book
Erasing addresses 4‑83
Registering e-mail addresses 4‑61
Registering fax numbers 4‑58
Registering file server addresses 4‑65
Registering group addresses 4‑67
Registering I-fax addresses 4‑63
Storing/editing 4‑58
Using 4‑43
Address Book Settings 12‑26
Automatic drawer switching 2‑25
13‑9
Cartridge
About the cartridge 1‑4
Maintaining 1‑21
Recycling 10‑20
Replacing 10‑14
Changing
Copy settings 3‑34
Checking
Arrival of I-fax jobs 5‑10
Copy job 3‑37
Print jobs 6‑7
RX jobs 5‑5
Status of fax jobs 4‑94
Status of received fax jobs 5‑5
Status of receive jobs 5‑7
Status of send jobs 4‑97
TX jobs 4‑94
Clean Earth Campaign 10‑20
Appendix
Cleaning machine
Exterior 10‑2
Fixing unit 10‑3
Scanning area 10‑6
Clearing jams
Duplex unit 11‑11
Feeder 11‑5
Fixing unit 11‑8
Paper drawer 1 11‑13
Paper drawer 2 11‑15
Stack bypass 11‑7
Clear key 1‑5
Collate copy 3‑21
Group mode 3‑23
Page order 3‑22
Same page 3‑23
Collate mode 3‑21
Collating
Collate mode 3‑21
Finisher mode 3‑21
Group mode 3‑21
Rotate mode 3‑22
13‑10
Color mode
Setting for sending 4‑18
Color paper 2‑11
Common Settings 12‑6
Communications Settings 12‑12
Components 1‑2
Confirming
Copy settings 3‑33
Consumables
Cartridge 10‑28
Paper stock 10‑27
Stamp cartridge 10‑28
Control panel
About the control panel 1‑2, 1‑5
Control panel power switch 1‑9
Control panel power switch 1‑5
Copy features ii
Copying 3‑1
Copy job
Canceling 3‑35
Checking 3‑37
Deleting 3‑37
COPY key 1‑5
Copy ratio 3‑14
Auto zoom 3‑17
Preset zoom 3‑15
Zoom by percentage 3‑16
COPY SETTINGS 12‑10
Customer support
Canada xxiv, 11‑31
U.S.A. xxiv, 11‑31
D
Deleting
Copy job 3‑37
Density
Automatic adjustment 4‑25
Manual adjustment 4‑24
Setting for sending 4‑24
Department ID Management
After using the machine 1‑19
Before using the machine 1‑17
Destination
Checking/changing 4‑49
Erasing 4‑51
Specifying 4‑32
Device status
Checking 1‑24
Direct sending 4‑54
Display Contrast dial 1‑6
Document
Printing 6‑2
Receiving 5‑2
Sending 4‑2
Document size
Setting for sending 4‑20
Duplex unit 1‑4, 11‑11
E
E-mail addresses
Registering in Address Book 4‑61
Registering in one-touch buttons 4‑75
Enlargement copy ratios 3‑15
F
Favorites buttons
Erasing 4‑88
Registering 4‑86
Storing/editing 4‑86
Using 4‑48
Fax numbers
Registering in Address Book 4‑58
Registering in one-touch buttons 4‑71
Feeder 2‑9
About the feeder 1‑2, 1‑3
Automatic feeder cleaning 10‑9
Clearing paper jams 11‑5
Manual feeder cleaning 10‑7
Specifications 13‑3
Feeder cover 1‑3
File format
Setting for sending 4‑14
File server addresses
Registering in Address Book 4‑65
Registering in one-touch buttons 4‑79
Finisher mode 3‑21
Fixing unit 1‑4, 11‑8
Front cover 1‑4
G
Group addresses
Registering in Address Book 4‑67
Registering in one-touch buttons 4‑81
Using 4‑46
Group mode 3‑21, 3‑23
Error codes 11‑21
Error indicator 1‑5
H
Error messages 11‑17
Handling xvii
Heavy paper 2‑11
Horizontal placement 2‑6
13‑11
Appendix
Entering characters
Alphanumeric characters 1‑13
Symbols 1‑14
Values in inches 1‑15
Envelope 2‑12
COM 10 2‑12
DL 2‑12
ISO-B5 2‑12
ISO-C5 2‑12
Monarch 2‑12
Envelopes 2‑11, 2‑15
Exposure 3‑12
Automatic adjustment 3‑12
Manual adjustment 3‑13
I
N
I-fax addresses
Registering in Address Book 4‑63
Registering in one-touch buttons 4‑77
If you cannot solve a problem 11‑31
New Address tab
Using 4‑32
Numeric keys 1‑5
J
Job recall 4‑56
L
Labels 2‑11
Left cover 1‑4
Legal 2‑12
Letter 2‑12
Loading
Envelopes 2‑15
Feeder 2‑9
Originals 2‑5
Paper 2‑15
Platen glass 2‑7
Preprinted paper 2‑29
Loading paper
Stack bypass 2‑15
Location xxi
Log In/Out key 1‑6
M
Machine components 1‑2
Appendix
Machine settings 12‑1
O
One-touch buttons
Erasing addresses 4‑85
Registering e-mail addresses 4‑75
Registering fax numbers 4‑71
Registering file server addresses 4‑79
Registering group addresses 4‑81
Registering I-fax addresses 4‑77
Storing/editing 4‑71
Using 4‑45
Orientation 2‑6
Original
Requirements 2‑2
Original and paper 2‑1
Original output area 1‑3
Original requirements 2‑2
Originals
Scanning area 2‑4
Original sizes 2‑5
Original supply tray 1‑3
Original type
Photo mode 3‑10
Text/Photo mode 3‑10
Text mode 3‑10
Original type selection 3‑11, 4‑26
Main power indicator 1‑5
Main power switch 1‑2
P
Maintaining the cartridge 1‑21
Paper
Loading 2‑15
Printable area 2‑14
Requirements 2‑11
Size and type 2‑19
Paper drawer’s left cover 1‑4
Maintenance xvii, 10‑1
Manual paper selection 3‑6
Manual sending 4‑52
Manuals for the machine i
13‑12
Paper drawers
About the paper drawers 1‑2
Clearing paper jams 11‑13, 11‑15
Paper requirements 2‑11
S
Safety instructions xvii
SCAN key 1‑5
Paper supply indicator 2‑27
Scan mode
Selecting 4‑16
Scanner feature vii
PC Faxing 8‑1
Scanning 7‑1
Photo mode 3‑10
Scanning area 1‑4, 2‑4
Plain paper 2‑11
Scanning originals
Computer 7‑2
Scan settings
Changing the color mode 4‑18
Copying 3‑10
Different size originals 4‑30
Document size 4‑20
Original type setting 4‑24
Resolution 4‑22
Scan density 4‑24
Selecting a scan mode 4‑16
Sending 4‑16
Two-sided originals 4‑28
Sending/Receiving features iv
Paper selection 3‑4
Platen glass 1‑4, 2‑7
Power supply xxiii
Preset zoom 3‑14, 3‑15
Printable area 2‑14
Printer feature vii
PRINTER SETTINGS 12‑20
Printing 6‑1
Printing USER’S DATA LIST 12‑2
Processing/Data indicator 1‑6
R
Receiving documents 5‑1
Recycled paper 2‑11
Recycling cartridge 10‑20
CANADA PROGRAM 10‑25
U.S.A. PROGRAM 10‑22
Reduction copy ratios 3‑15
Remote UI 9‑1
Replacing the cartridge 10‑14
Replacing the stamp cartridge 10‑12
Report Settings 12‑27
SEND key 1‑5
Serial No. key 1‑5
Service call messages 11‑29
Setting paper size and type
Stack bypass 2‑21
Setting paper type
Paper drawers 2‑19
Setting the speed or print side priority 2‑28
Sleep mode 1‑22
Slide guides 1‑3, 2‑9
Reserved copy 3‑19
Reset key 1‑5
Resolution
Setting for sending 4‑22
Rotate mode 3‑22
13‑13
Appendix
Remote UI feature vii
Sending documents 4‑1
Specifications
Copier 13‑4
Ethernet interface adaptor 13‑8
Facsimile 13‑6
Feeder 13‑3
General 13‑2
Printer 13‑5
Send feature 13‑7
Specifying destinations 4‑32
Using group addresses 4‑46
Using the Address Book 4‑43
Using the favorites buttons 4‑48
Using the New Address tab 4‑32
Using the one-touch buttons 4‑45
Stack bypass 2‑15
About the stack bypass 1‑2
Clearing paper jams 11‑7
Stamp cartridge
Replacing 10‑12
Start key 1‑5
Stop key 1‑5
Storing/editing
Address Book 4‑58
Favorites buttons 4‑86
One-touch buttons 4‑71
Switching the scanner offline 7‑5
Switching the scanner online 7‑4
System Settings viii, 12‑29
T
Appendix
Text/Photo mode 3‑10
Text mode 3‑10
Timer Settings 1‑22, 12‑11
Touch panel display
About the touch panel display 1‑6, 1‑10
Entering characters 1‑12
Frequently used keys 1‑10
Touch panel key display 1‑11
Transparency 2‑11
Troubleshooting 11‑1
13‑14
Two-Sided copying 3‑25
1 to 2-Sided 3‑25
2 to 1-Sided 3‑26
2 to 2-Sided 3‑25
Book to 2-Sided 3‑26
U
USER’S DATA LIST
Printing 12‑2
User ID Management
After using the machine 1‑19
Before using the machine 1‑18
Using the printer settings menu 12‑4
V
Vertical placement 2‑6
Z
Zoom by percentage 3‑14, 3‑16
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE S.A.S.
(Pour les utilisateurs de l’imprimante laser uniquement)
12, rue de l’Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON ESPAÑA, S.A.
c/ Joaquín Costa 41, 28002 Madrid, Spain
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400, Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
FT5-1106 (000)
© CANON INC. 2007
PRINTED IN JAPAN OR CHINA
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement